Yamaha CLP-970AC El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: CLP-970AC

Categoría: Pianos digitales

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

Owner’s manual

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage

matches the voltage specified on the name

plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a

voltage selector may be provided on the bottom

panel of the main keyboard unit near the power

cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set

for the voltage in your area. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially

shipped. To change the setting use a “minus”

screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that

the correct voltage appears next to the pointer

on the panel.

CLP-970AC

CLP-970AM

CLP-970A

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS:

Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE:

All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning:

Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CLP-970A/970AM/970AC

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-469

CLP-970A

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even

death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The

instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use

immediately and have it inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on

it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of

the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the

power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualiﬁed

Yamaha service personnel.

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name

plate of the instrument.

• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an

electric plug with wet hands.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it.

(1) B-6

CLP-970A

PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or

others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited

to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend

or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk

on, trip over, or roll anything over it.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the

cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower

sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time,

or during electrical storms.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components.

Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set

the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing

the instrument to set the desired listening level.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sun-

light, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to

the internal components.

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this

might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents,

cleaning ﬂuids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on

the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the

buttons, switches or connectors.

• Take care that the key cover does not pinch your ﬁngers, and do not insert a ﬁnger or hand in the key cover

gap.

• Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard.

If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the

instrument inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause

inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the

instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this

can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a phy-

sician.

(1) B-6

CLP-970A

PRECAUTIONS

■

USING THE BENCH (If included)

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose

might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the

included tool.

■

SAVING USER DATA

• Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 in order to help prevent the

loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the instrument,

or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

(1) B-6

CLP-970A

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970A/970AM/970AC. In order to make the

most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual

thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.

About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet

This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also,

a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided.

Introduction:

Please read this section ﬁrst. In the “Application Index” section on page 11 and “Features” on

page 14, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations.

Basic Operation:

This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you

play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to

the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89, or the “Index”

on page 99.

Detailed Settings:

This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions.

Refer to this section as necessary.

Appendix:

This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference

material.

Reference Booklet:

XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc.

* The models CLP-970AM and CLP-970AC will be referred to as the CLP-970A in this Owner’s Manual.

• The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and

may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument.

■

Trademarks

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what

you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system

(the manual is not written for any speciﬁc models). The document is available as a PDF ﬁle (in English) at

the following Internet address:

Clavinova Web site:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

Yamaha Manual Library

(Electronic Musical Instruments)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

(For the Manual Library, you need to register ﬁrst. Check the Clavinovas [Digital Piano] web page.)

CLP-970A

Table of contents

Introduction.......................................................... 2

PRECAUTIONS........................................................................................................................................ 3

About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 6

Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 7

Application Index

Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. ................................. 11

Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 13

Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 13

Features ................................................................................................................................................ 14

Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 16

Key cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16

Music stand ................................................................................................................................................................... 16

Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 17

Adjusting the display contrast...................................................................................................................................... 18

Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 18

Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 18

Basic Operation .................................................. 19

Part Names........................................................................................................................................... 20

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 22

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 24

Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 24

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs....................................................................................................... 26

Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 28

Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 28

Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 29

Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 30

Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE].................................................................................................................................. 32

Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 33

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 35

Using the metronome................................................................................................................................................... 38

Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 39

Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 39

Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 39

Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 41

Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 42

Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 43

Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 44

Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 44

Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 44

Changing a voice or tempo after recording........................................................................................................... 45

CLP-970A

Table of contents

Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 46

Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 47

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]...................................................................... 48

Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 48

Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 49

Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 50

Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory... [DeleteSong]................................................................................... 51

Renaming a song...[RenameSong]............................................................................................................................... 52

Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 52

Playing Back Recorded Songs .............................................................................................................. 53

Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 53

Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 55

Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 56

Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 56

Connecting a personal computer................................................................................................................................. 58

Detailed Settings ................................................ 63

Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 64

Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 64

Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 66

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 68

Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 68

Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay]...................................... 69

Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 69

Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 69

Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 69

Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 70

Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]........................................................ 71

Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 71

Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 71

Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 71

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING].............................................................................. 72

Setting the octave [Octave]*......................................................................................................................................... 72

Setting the volume level [Volume]*............................................................................................................................. 72

Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* ................................................................................................ 73

Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune]................................................................................................. 73

Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType]....................................................................................................................... 73

Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]*...................................................................................................................... 73

Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 74

Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]*..................................................................................................................... 74

Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 74

Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] .................................................................................................... 74

Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* ................................................................................................... 75

Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]*................................................................................................................ 75

CLP-970A

Table of contents

Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 75

Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 76

Setting the left pedal function [LPedal]....................................................................................................................... 76

Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 76

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 77

About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 77

Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 78

Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 78

Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 79

Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 79

Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 79

Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 79

Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 80

Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump].................................................................................................... 80

Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup]...................................................................................... 80

Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 80

Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 81

Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 81

Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 81

Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]............................................................................... 81

Selecting a scale [Scale]................................................................................................................................................. 82

Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 82

Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 82

Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] .............................................................. 83

Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode]........................................................................ 83

Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/Pause]...................................................................... 83

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 83

Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 84

Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 84

Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative]..................................................................................... 84

Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 85

Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 85

Other method for restoring the normal settings......................................................................................................... 85

Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 86

Questions about Operations and Functions........................................................................................89

CLP-970A

Table of contents

Appendix ............................................................ 91

Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................... 92

Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................... 93

Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................... 95

CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly ........................................................................ 96

Index..................................................................................................................................................... 99

CLP-970A

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your application

and situation.

Listening

Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 22

“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 24

Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 22

Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Clavinova” .......“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 24

Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 39

“Playing back a song” on page 53

Playing

Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 29

Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................... “Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]” on page 32

Changing tonal color

Viewing the list of voices.................................................................................. “Preset Voice List” on page 93

Simulating a concert hall...........................................................................................“[REVERB]” on page 31

Combining two voices..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 33

Playing different sounds with left and right hands

...........................“Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 35

Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 30

Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 31

Practicing

Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 26

Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 38

Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 39

“Turning track playback on and off” on page 55

Recording

Recording your performance......................................................“Recording Your Performance” on page 39

Saving recorded songs to memory .....“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 48

CLP-970A

Application Index

Use this index to ﬁnd reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation.

Settings

Making detailed settings for recording and playback

............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 68

Making detailed settings for the metronome

......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 71

Making detailed settings for the voices

................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 72

Making detailed settings for MIDI ....................................................“MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 77

Making detailed settings for the Clavinova.........................................................“Other settings” on page 81

Connecting the Clavinova to other devices

What is MIDI?..................................................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 77

Recording your performance.....................................................“AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 56

Raising the volume ..................................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 56

Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova.......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 57

Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58

Assembling

Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova

............................................................. “CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 96

Quick solution

What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 11

“Features” on page 14

Returning to the main screen..............................................................................“[EXIT] button” on page 21

Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting

................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 85

Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 86

If you have questions about operations and functions

..............................................................................“Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89

Troubleshooting............................................................................................... “Troubleshooting” on page 92

CLP-970A

Maintenance

Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well).

Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber

products on the instrument.

Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded.

Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-5.

Tuning

Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune.

Transporting

If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other stuff. You can move the unit as it

is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition when you ﬁrst open the package. Transport the

keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it to the wall and the like.

Included Accessories

“50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection

Bench

(included or optional depending on locale)

Owner’s Manual

Reference Booklet

CLP-970A

The music stand can be removed to allow

placement of a laptop-type personal computer or

other equipment on top of the instrument. (page 16)

A set of standard

stereo headphones

can be plugged in

here for private

practice. (page 18)

Connect an optional

pedal here and assign

one of the various

functions to the pedal.

(page 57)

Connect the pedal

cord here to use the

Clavinova’s pedals.

(page 58)

These jacks allow you to connect

an external tone generator to

reproduce the sound via the

Clavinova’s internal sound system

and speakers. (page 57)

Connect a MIDI device

here to use various

MIDI functions.

(page 58, 61)

(About MIDI—page 77)

Connect recording equipment

(such as a cassette tape

recorder) here to record your

performance. (page 56)

This jack and selector switch allow direct

connection to a personal computer for

sequencing and other music applications.

(page 57-62)

PHONES

MIDI

HOST SELECT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

TO HOST

AUX PEDAL

PEDAL

OUT INTHRU

L/L

AUX IN

L/L

AUX OUT

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

Features

The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970A digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type play-

ability as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone generation technology for rich, musical

voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard that provides graded key weight and response throughout the key-

board range. The CLP-970A GrandPiano1 voice features totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full con-

cert grand piano. The CLP-970A GrandPiano1 voice features ﬁve velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), a

“Soundboard Reverb” (page 31) effect that accurately simulates the resonance of a piano soundboard, “String Reso-

nance” (page 82) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sampling” (page 82)that samples the

unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Key-

off Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-970A comes much closer to

the sound of a true acoustic piano.

CLP-970A 15

Features

[OTHER SETTING]

Fine-tune the touch response

and pitch, etc. (page 81)

The Clavinova includes 50 preset

songs.

This section enables you to listen to

these songs, practice using a

convenient practice function, record

and play back your performance.

(page 24, 39, 53)

The display allows

accurate control

and operation.

(page 21)

[MIDI SETTING]

Make detailed MIDI

settings, such as MIDI

receive/transmit

channels. (page 77)

[FILE]

Save recorded songs and

manage song files. (page 48)

MAIN voice gruop buttons

Select voices from 25 internal sounds

including Grand Piano 1. (page 28)

You can also combine two voices at a

time. (page 33)

[DEMO]

Demonstration playback

is available for each

voice. (page 22)

[METRONOME]

Use the

metronome

functions.

(page 38)

[CONTRAST]

Adjust the

brightness of

the display

using this

control.

(page 18)

[REVERB]/

[CHORUS]

Add reverb

(reverberation) and

spread (chorus) to

the sound.

(page 31)

[MASTER

VOLUME]

Adjust the

volume level

using this

slider.

(page 18)

[SONG SETTING]

Make detailed

settings for song

recording and

playback. (page 68)

[EXIT]

The screen returns to

its main display when

you press this button.

(page 21)

TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ]

You can shift the pitch

of the entire keyboard

up or down so that the

pitch will match that of

another instrument or

singer, while you play

the same keys.

(page 32)

TEMPO [DOWN]

[UP]

You can change the

song tempo

(speed).

(page 25, 38, 40, 54)

[VOICE

SETTING]

You can make

detailed settings

for tone and

effects.

(page 72)

BRILLIANCE

[ ] [ ]

Adjust the

brightness of

the tone using

these buttons.

(page 30)

LEFT voice group buttons/

[SPLIT POINT]

You can play different voices on

the left- and right-hand sections of

the keyboard. (page 35)

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

16 CLP-970A

Before Using the Clavinova

Key cover

To open the key cover:

Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open.

To close the key cover:

Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the

cover over the keys.

Music stand

To install the music stand:

Hold the upper and bottom sides of the music stand with both hands and insert the peg on the speaker box

into the holes on the rear of the stand.

To remove the music stand:

Lift the music stand slightly, then pull it toward you to remove it.

Be careful to avoid catching your fingers

when opening or closing the cover.

CAUTION

Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be

careful to avoid catching ﬁngers (yours or others, especially children’s between the cover and the unit.

Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key

cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could

cause electric shock, short circuit, ﬁre or other serious damage to the instrument.

• The music stand can be removed to allow

placement of a laptop personal computer or

other equipment on top of the instrument.

CLP-970A 17

Before Using the Clavinova

Turning the power on

1. Connect the power cable.

First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of

the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall.

In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in

your area.

WARNING!

Make sure your CLP-970A is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on

the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main key-

board unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the

wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard!

Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-970A. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, con-

tact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a ﬁre and shock hazard!

The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-970A may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In

some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin conﬁguration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify

the plug provided with the CLP-970A. If the plug will not ﬁt the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualiﬁed electrician.

2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova.

Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on.

• The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indica-

tor located below the left end of the keyboard lights up.

Power indicator

If you close the key cover

without turning the power

off, the power indicator

remains lit, indicating that

the power is still on.

Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova.

• The screen and the power indicator turn off.

The power connector is located on the bottom of the key-

board, set back deeply.

(The shape of plug differs

depending on locale.)

TIP

Power indicator

[POWER] switch

A B

C D

NO YES

When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name

appears on the screen.

18 CLP-970A

Before Using the Clavinova

Adjusting the display contrast

You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD.

CONTRAST:

difference between bright-

ness and darkness

Setting the volume

While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by moving the [MASTER VOLUME] slider on the left of

the front panel to the left or right.

MASTER VOLUME:

The volume level of the

entire keyboard sound

You can also adjust the

[PHONES] output level and

the AUX IN input level using

the [MASTER VOLUME]

slider.

Using headphones

Connect a pair of headphones to

one of the [PHONES] jacks. When

the headphones are plugged into

either of the [PHONES] jacks, the

internal speaker system is automat-

ically shut off.

Two [PHONES] jacks are provided.

Two sets of standard stereo head-

phones can be plugged in. (If you

are using only one pair of head-

phones, you can plug them into

either of these jacks.)

TERMINOLOGY

A B

C D

NO YES

CONTRAST

EXIT

Use this knob.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

The level decreases. The level increases.

MASTER VOLUME

MIN MAX

Do not use the Clavinova at

a high volume level for a

long period of time, or your

hearing may be damaged.

PHONES

standard stereo phone plug

bottom surface

Optional headphones

HPE-160 Yamaha head-

phones.

TIP

19 CLP-970A

Basic Operation

CLP-970A 19

20 CLP-970A

Part Names

Center “C”

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

PHONES

C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4

C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

B-1A-1

3 5

L M O

G I J K N P

7 B

4 6 0 A

9 C

Top panel

[POWER]..............................................P17

2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P18

3 [DEMO] ...............................................P22

4 TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] ..........................P32

5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]..........P24, 39, 53

6 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]....................P46

7 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] /

[EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 41–46, 55

8 [FILE] ...................................................P48

9 SONG [STOP] /

[START/PAUSE] .......................P24, 40, 54

0 [REC]....................................................P40

A [SONG SETTING] ................................P68

B METRONOME [START/STOP] /

[SETTING]......................................P38, 71

C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .......P25, 38, 40, 54

D LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] /

C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P21

E LCD screen ..........................................P21

F [CONTRAST] knob...............................P18

G [EXIT]...................................................P21

H Voice group buttons for the MAIN

section.................................................P28

I [SPLIT POINT] .....................................P36

J Voice group buttons for the LEFT

section.................................................P35

K [VOICE SETTING] ................................P72

L [REVERB]..............................................P31

M [CHORUS]............................................P31

N BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] ...........................P30

O [MIDI SETTING]...................................P77

P [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P81

Q [PHONES] ............................................P18

R Soft pedal............................................P29

S Sostenuto pedal ..................................P29

T Damper pedal .....................................P29

CLP-970A 21

Part Names

Connectors

LCD buttons

E LCD

Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD.

Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A

voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit.

G[EXIT] button

When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the screen that indicates a voice

name(s) and is displayed when the power is turned on).

MIDI

HOST SELECT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

TO HOST

AUX PEDAL

PEDAL

OUT INTHRU

L/L

AUX IN

L/L

AUX OUT

[

WX Y

U AUX OUT [R] [L/L+R]..........................P56

V AUX IN [R] [L/L+R] .............................P57

W [AUX PEDAL] ......................................P57

X [TO HOST] ..........................................P57

Y HOST SELECT ..................................... P57

Z MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P58

[ [PEDAL] .............................................. P58

Panel logos

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI stan-

dard which guarantees that any data conforming to the

standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible

tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer.

You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI

IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “GM

System Level 1”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A

and control it from a connected computer or sequencer.

bottom surface

XG Format

XG is a new Yamaha MIDI speciﬁcation which signiﬁcantly expands and

improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling

capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compati-

bility with GM.

You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST

connector on the CLP-970A to play “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP-

970A and control it from a connected computer or sequencer.

A B

C D

NO YES

22 CLP-970A

Listening to the Demonstration

Tunes

The Clavinova provides demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate each of the MAIN voice groups.

Refer to the table below for voice names and corresponding demo songs.

Demonstration tunes

Procedure

Mode:

A mode is a status under

which you can execute a

certain function. In demo

mode, you can play back

demonstration tunes.

1. Engage the demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode.

The MAIN voice group (upper row) button indicators light up in

sequence.

To adjust the volume level of

the demo songs, use the

[MASTER VOLUME] slider.

2. Select a tune and start playback.

Press the voice group button (upper row) of the desired

demonstration tune.

The corresponding voice button indicator lights up and playback

starts. Until you stop playback, the selected tune will be played

repeatedly using different voices (in the following order: PIANO

→

E. PIANO/BASS → HARPSICHORD → MALLET → ORGAN →

STRINGS/CHOIR).

Voice group Tunes Composer

PIANO

E.PIANO/BASS

HARPSICHORD

MALLET

ORGAN

STRINGS/CHOIR

Chanson de l’adieu

Original

Le Coucou

Original

Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2

Original

F.F. Chopin

–

L.C. Daguin

–

G.F. Händel

–

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 4

2 3

MAIN voice

group buttons

TERMINOLOGY

A B

C D

NO YES

NOTE

CLP-970A 23

Listening to the Demonstration Tunes

3. Stop the playback.

Press the button of the voice group being played or the

[STOP] button.

4. Exit from demo mode.

Press the [DEMO] or [EXIT] button to exit from demo

mode.

24 CLP-970A

Listening to 50 Piano Preset

Songs

The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 24) or

use them for practice (page 26). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Clavinova” that contains

the scores for 50 piano preset songs.

Playing the 50 piano preset songs

Procedure

Song:

On the Clavinova, perfor-

mance data is called a

“Song.” This includes dem-

onstration tunes and piano

preset tunes.

1. Select a song.

Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to

select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050.

You can play the keyboard

along with the preset song

playback. You can change the

voice playing on the keyboard.

2. Play a preset song.

Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

METRONOME [START/STOP]

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

TERMINOLOGY

A B

C D

NO YES

The song number appears on the display.

Song select screen

TIP

• You can also use the C

[–]/[+] buttons to select a

song after pressing the

[SONG SELECT] button.

• [P-000: NewSong] is a

blank song provided for

you to record your perfor-

mance. (See page 39.)

• Use the SongRepeat

parameter in the “SONG

SETTING” menu to

select repeat playback of

all songs or repeat play-

back of a single song.

(See page 70.)

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

the number of measures

CLP-970A

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Adjusting the tempo

You can also use the D[–]/[+]

buttons to change the tempo.

Resetting the tempo

Whenever you select a new

preset song, the tempo is

automatically reset to the

song’s original value.

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when

you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously.

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

Stop the song playback.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.

Fast forward and rewind

You can perform the following operations in the song select screen:

• Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast for-

ward) through the song while the song is played or stopped.

• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to

restart playback from the top of the song.

• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start

playback from the next song.

• Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is

stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song.

Default screen:

The default screen is a voice

select screen (page 28) that

appears when you turn on

the power to the Clavinova.

Return to the default screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

TIP

NOTE

A B

C D

NO YES

TERMINOLOGY

26 CLP-970A

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs

The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and

right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off)

on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2].

procedure

You can turn parts on or off,

even during playback.

1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice.

After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or

[TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part.

When you ﬁrst select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indica-

tors light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you

press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding but-

ton indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted.

Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off.

2. Start playback and playing.

Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the

part you just turned off.

Synchro:

Synchronous;occurring at the

same time

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the

keyboard (Synchro Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This

is called the “Synchro Start” function.

To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the

[STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/

PAUSE] indicator ﬂashes.

Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while

the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

CLP-970A 27

Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs

3. Stop playback.

Resetting the part play-

back

Both parts are automatically

turned ON whenever you

select a new song.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle

of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by

pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press

the button.

TIP

You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to

the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 69.

28 CLP-970A

Selecting and Playing Voices

Selecting Voices

Procedure

To learn characteristics of

the voices, listen to demo

songs for each voice group

(page 22). Refer to “Preset

Voice List” on page 93 for

more information on charac-

teristics of each preset voice.

1. Select a voice group.

Press one of the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row).

Voice

On the Clavinova, a voice

means “tone” or “tonal color.”

You can control the loudness

of a voice by how hard you

play the keyboard, although

different playing styles (touch

sensitivities) have little or no

effect with the sound of cer-

tain musical instruments.

Refer to “Preset Voice List” on

page 93.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

MAIN voice

group buttons

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

Voice group Voice name Voice group Voice name

PIANO

GrandPiano1

MALLET

Vibraphone

GrandPiano2 Marimba

E.PIANO/

BASS

E.Piano1 Celesta

E.Piano2

ORGAN

PipeOrganPrincipal

SynthPiano PipeOrganFlute1

WoodBass PipeOrganFlute2

ElectricBass PipeOrganTutti

Bass&Cymbal JazzOrgan

HARPSI-

CHORD

Harpsichord8'

STRINGS/

CHOIR

Strings

Harpsichord8'+4' SynthStrings

ElectricClavichord SlowStrings

Choir

SlowChoir

Scat

CLP-970A 29

Selecting and Playing Voices

Using the pedals

The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto

pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive

effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano.

If the damper pedal doesn’t

work, or notes are sustained

even when the pedal is not

pressed, make sure that the

pedal cord is properly

plugged into the PEDAL jack

on the unit (see step 5 on

page 97). Also, make sure

that the RPedal parameter

in the “VOICE SETTING”

menu is set to ON (see page

75).

Damper (right) pedal

When you press the damper pedal, the notes

you play have a longer sustain.

When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the

damper pedal activates the instrument’s special

“Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the

unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s

soundboard and strings.

You can adjust the depth of

the resonance produced by

the “Sustain Samples” using

the Sustain Sampling Depth

parameter in the “OTHER

SETTING” menu. (See page

82.)

Sostenuto (center) pedal

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard

and press the sostenuto pedal while holding

the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as

the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will

not sustain.

You can assign a function to

each pedal via the “R

Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L

Pedal” parameters in the

“VOICE SETTING” menu.

(See page 75, 76.)

The center and left pedals

can also be assigned to

song start/stop operation

(START/PAUSE function) via

the “PedalStart/Pause”

parameter in the “OTHER

SETTING” menu (on page

83).

Soft pedal (left)

The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes

played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are

already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you

play the target notes.)

With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and

off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 76.)

TIP

When you press the damper

pedal here, the notes you

play before you release the

pedal have a longer sustain.

TIP

When you press the sostenuto

pedal here while holding the

note(s), the notes will sustain

as long as you hold the pedal.

TIP

30 CLP-970A

Selecting and Playing Voices

Adding variation to the sound

[BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS]

The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance,

Reverb, and Chorus.

[BRILLIANCE]

You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference.

Procedure

You can also use the D [–]/

[+] buttons after you press

one of the [BRILLIANCE]

buttons to select the desired

option.

Normal setting = Normal

Normal setting:

The “Normal setting” refers

to the default setting (factory

setting) obtained when you

ﬁrst turn on the power to the

Clavinova.

If you select [Bright] or

[Metallic] as the type of bril-

liance, the volume level will

increase slightly. Under this

condition, if you raise the

[MASTER VOLUME] slider

setting, the sound may

become distorted. In this

case, lower the volume

accordingly.

Press one of the BRILLIANCE [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the

desired tonality.

Dark.................... Dark tone

Mellow ................ Soft and mellow tone

Normal ............... Standard tone

Bright ................. Bright tone

Metallic............... Sharp metallic tone

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[REVERB] [CHORUS]

BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ]

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

NOTE

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-970A 31

Selecting and Playing Voices

[REVERB]

This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall.

Procedure

You can select a reverb type

via the Reverb Type param-

eter in the “VOICE SET-

TING” menu, and adjust the

reverb depth for the selected

voice via the Reverb Send

parameter. (See page 73.)

Normal setting = ON

Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb

on and off.

Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect

will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is

selected.

[CHORUS]

This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound.

Procedure

You can select a chorus type

via the Chorus Type param-

eter in the “VOICE SET-

TING” menu, and adjust the

chorus depth for the

selected voice via the

Reverb Send parameter. You

can also turn chorus on or

off via the Chorus On Off

parameter. (See page 74.)

Normal Setting

The normal chorus on/off

setting is different for each

voice.

Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the cho-

rus on and off.

You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS]

ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off

parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 74). The [CHO-

RUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if

you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is

cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each

voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is auto-

matically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting.

TIP

32 CLP-970A

Selecting and Playing Voices

Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]

The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in

semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difﬁcult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the

keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to

“5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavi-

nova will transpose it to the key of F.

You can also change the key signature of playback songs, in addition to your own performance.

Procedure

Transpose:

Changing the key signature

of a song. On the Clavinova,

transposing shifts the pitch

of the entire keyboard.

1. Display the Transpose screen.

Press one of the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons.

2. Select a type of transposition from Manual or Song.

Use the C [–] and [+] buttons to select Manual or Song.

Manual ............... Your manual performance

Song .................... Playback song

The transposition range is

from “–12 semitones” (down

one octave) through “0” (nor-

mal pitch) to “12 semitones”

(up one octave).

3. Set the transposition amount.

Use the D [–] and [+] or TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons

to set the transposition amount.

To set the amount of transposition to “0,” press the D [–] and [+] but-

tons or the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously.

4. Return to the main screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

21 3 3

TERMINOLOGY

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CLP-970A 33

Selecting and Playing Voices

Combining two voices (Dual mode)

You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate

a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Exam-

ples (Dual and Split)” on page 95 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Dual mode using voices in different voice groups

Procedure

1. Enter Dual mode.

Press two MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) simulta-

neously.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a

voice.

The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 93 are

called 1st voices, and those listed in the bottom row are called 2nd

voices.

3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any MAIN voice group button.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 32

2 3 1 4

MAIN voice

The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps

The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps

group buttons

in Dual mode using voices from different groups.

in Dual mode using voices from the same group.

MAIN voice

group buttons

A B

C D

NO YES

1st voice 2nd voice

34 CLP-970A

Selecting and Playing Voices

Dual mode using voices in the same voice group

Procedure

1. Select a voice group.

In normal play mode, press the desired MAIN voice group

button.

2. Select a voice.

Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice.

3. Select another voice.

Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the

same voice group.

To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use

different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] but-

tons repeatedly.

4. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode.

Press any MAIN voice group button.

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-970A 35

Selecting and Playing Voices

Splitting the keyboard range and playing two differ-

ent voices (Split mode)

Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another

with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the

left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on

page 95 for examples of effective voice combinations.

Procedure

1. Enter Split mode.

Press one of the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row).

2. Select a voice for the right hand.

Use the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) and the A

[–]/[+] buttons.

3. Select a voice for the left hand.

Use the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row) and the C

[–]/[+] buttons.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 3 5

3 44

MAIN voice

LEFT voice

group buttons

A B

C D

NO YES

36 CLP-970A

Selecting and Playing Voices

A speciﬁed “split point” key

is included in the left-hand

range.

4. Specify the split point (the border between the right-

and left-hand range).

The normal setting of the split point is “F

2.”

Voice group

Voice name

MAIN LEFT

PIANO PIANO/E.PIANO GrandPiano1

GrandPiano2

E.PIANO/BASS E.Piano1

E.Piano2

SynthPiano

BASS WoodBass

ElectricBass

Bass&Cymbal

HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD/MALLET Harpsichord8'

Harpsichord8'+4'

EcelctricClavichord

MALLET Vibraphone

Marimba

Celesta

ORGAN ORGAN/STRINGS PipeOrganPrincipal

PipeOrganFlute1

PipeOrganFlute2

PipeOrganTutti

JazzOrgan

STRINGS/CHOIR Strings

SynthStrings

SlowStrings

Choir

SlowChoir

Scat

TIP

Center “C”

CLP-970A 37

Selecting and Playing Voices

To change the split point setting:

Press the [SPLIT POINT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] but-

tons to specify the split point.

(Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT POINT] button

and play the key you wish to assign as the split point.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen.

5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode.

Press the voice group button that you pressed for the left-

hand range.

In Split mode, you can use Dual mode (see page 33) for the MAIN and

LEFT ranges respectively.

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

38 CLP-970A

Selecting and Playing Voices

Using the metronome

The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for

practice.

Procedure

1. Start the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator ﬂashes at the

current tempo.

Adjusting the tempo

The default tempo is 120. (If

a song has been selected,

the song tempo is used.)

Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button.

You can set the time signa-

ture, metronome volume,

and metronome tone using

the METRONOME [SET-

TING] button. (See page 71.)

To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–400), use the TEMPO

[DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal

(default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] keys or the D [–] and [+] keys

simultaneously.

Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen.

2. Stop the metronome.

Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 2

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CLP-970A 39

Recording Your Performance

You can record your perfor-

mance (audio data) to a cas-

sette tape recorder or other

recording devices via the

AUX OUT connector. (see

page 56.)

This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova

recording function.

You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova key-

board for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part,

then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand

part.

Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the left-

and right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed perfor-

mance or ensemble song one by one to build a song.

Recording vs. Saving:

The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cas-

sette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and

a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the

saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However,

this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense.

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 86 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and

troubleshooting information.

Recording a New Song

Recording to [TRACK 1]

Procedure

If you select a song other

than “P-000: NewSong” and

record on a track that already

has data, the existing data on

the track will be lost.

1. Select “NewSong” for recording.

Press the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons simulta-

neously.

TIP

TERMINOLOGY

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

4 5

NOTE

A B

C D

NO YES

New Song screen

40 CLP-970A

Recording Your Performance

Set the tempo in Step 3.

See page 47 for more infor-

mation on recording in Dual/

Split mode.

2. Select a voice.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 28).

Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus.

Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the volume level to suit

your preference. You can also use the slider to adjust the level during

playback.

After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not

appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to

return to the New Song screen.

3. Enter record mode and select a recording track.

Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 1] button.

The [TRACK 1] indicator ﬂashes in red. (To cancel recording, press

the [REC] or [STOP] button.)

Set the tempo, if necessary.

If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG

SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once.

You can record data while

using the metronome. The

metronome is not recorded.

When you press the

[START/PAUSE] button dur-

ing recording, recording is

paused. To resume record-

ing, press the [START/

PAUSE] button again or play

a note on the keyboard.

4. Start and stop recording.

Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a

note on the keyboard.

(Optional) Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start recording.

The recording screen displays the current measure number.

When you press the [REC]

button, recording pauses.

To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova

locates the top of the song.

The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is auto-

matically cancelled.)

NOTE

Record standby screen

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Measure number in recording

Record screen

TIP

CLP-970A 41

Recording Your Performance

To erase recorded data from

a track, use the Channel

Clear parameter in the

“SONG SETTING” menu.

(See page 69.)

5. Play back the recorded performance.

Press the [START/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded

performance.

When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.

Re-recording TRACK 1

This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory.

Procedure

1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 40 if you wish to change the previ-

ous settings.

Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 40 to re-record.

The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data.

NOTE

When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance

data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the

SaveToMemory parameter (page 50) in the File menu.

42 CLP-970A

Recording Your Performance

Re-recording TRACK 1 partially

This section explains how to record part of a song again.

Procedure

If the playback screen is not

displayed, press one of the

SONG SELECT

[] []

buttons once.

1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish

to re-record.

Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is dis-

played to move through the measures or play back the

recording and press the [START/PAUSE] button to locate a

point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish

to re-record.

2. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary.

Repeat Step 2 on page 40 if you wish to change the previ-

ous settings.

3. Select the recording method and enter record mode.

3-1 Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the

C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the

recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons

repeatedly to specify how the recording should end.

While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following record-

ing method select screen appears.

Starting methods:

Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording

starts.

Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a

note will not be erased.

NOTE

A B

C D

NO YES

Playback screen

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-970A 43

Recording Your Performance

Ending methods:

Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be

erased.

Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain.

If you cancel recording by

pressing the [REC] button,

recording stops when you

press the button. If you can-

cel recording by pressing

the [STOP] button, the Clavi-

nova locates the top of the

song.

3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 1] button.

The [TRACK 1] indicator ﬂashes in red.

(To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP]

button.)

Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40.

Recording to [TRACK2]

This section explains how to record another part on the second track.

Procedure

1. Select a voice.

Select a voice (or voices) for recording.

Repeat Step 2 on page 40.

Pressing the [TRACK 1] but-

ton repeatedly toggles

between playback on (the

indicator lights up in green)

and off (the indicator turns

off).

2. Enter record mode and select a recording track.

Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the

[TRACK 2] button.

The [TRACK 2] indicator ﬂashes in red. (To cancel recording, press

the [REC] or [STOP] button.)

Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40.

You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data.

TIP

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

44 CLP-970A

Recording Your Performance

Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS]

You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one.

Procedure

1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Record-

ing to [TRACK2]” on page 43 and use the B [–]/[+] but-

tons to select a recording track (3–16).

2. While holding down the [REC] key, press the [EXTRA

TRACKS] button.

Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40.

Other recording techniques

Adding data to or recording over an existing song

The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P-

000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs

[P-001—P-050], or your old recorded performances [see page 48]).

Procedure

If you record on a track that

already has data, the exist-

ing data on the track will be

lost.

1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050).

Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000:

NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on

page 39. To select a song from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2

on page 53.

To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 39 to 44.

A B

C D

NO YES

select a recording track (3-16)

NOTE

CLP-970A 45

Recording Your Performance

Changing a voice or tempo after recording

You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo.

You can also change these elements in the middle of a song.

Procedure

Refer to “Questions about

Operations and Functions”

on page 89 for information

on the settings that can be

changed here.

1. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG

SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons.

2. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the

song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/

[+] buttons.

Change the tempo in Step 4.

3. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.).

For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E.

Piano2, use the MAIN voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons

to select E.Piano2.

When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ]

[ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen.

The edited settings (except

for the tempo setting) will be

saved in memory and you

will not be able to restore the

previous settings. Proceed

with caution.

4. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the

track to change.

The indicator for the selected track lights up in red.

Change the tempo setting now, if necessary.

At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [START/PAUSE]

button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data.

5. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode.

TIP

CAUTION

46 CLP-970A

Recording Your Performance

Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG

BALANCE]

While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the play-

back of the recorded parts and your current performance.

Procedure

1. Press one of the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons.

The song balance setting is

also used during playback.

(See page 53.)

2. Adjust the song balance using the SONG BALANCE

[ ] [ ] or D [–]/[+] buttons.

To lower the volume of the playback sound, press the SONG BAL-

ANCE [ ] or D [–] button.

To lower the volume of the performance sound, press the SONG BAL-

ANCE [ ] or D [+] button.

Setting range:

127:127 – 1:127 (Lowering the volume of the playback sound)

127:127 – 127:1 (Lowering the volume of the performance sound)

Normal setting: 127:127

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CLP-970A 47

Recording Your Performance

Recording in Dual or Split mode

When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The follow-

ing table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice.

CAUTION

When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see

page 44), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution.

In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording.

Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16

If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used.

Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded.

Tracks assigned for

recording

Dual Split Split+Dual

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

TRACK1 TRACK2

EXTRA

TRACKn

↓↓↓ ↓↓↓ ↓↓↓

Tracks

used for

record-

ing

MAIN

(1st voice)

TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn

LEFT

(1st voice)

–

TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1

MAIN

(2nd voice)

TRACK3 TRACK4 TRACKn +2

–

TRACK3 TRACKn +2

LEFT

(2nd voice)

––

TRACK4 TRACKn +3

TIP

48 CLP-970A

Saving Recorded Songs and

Handling the Files...[FILE]

File

A ﬁle contains a group of

data. On the Clavinova, a

song ﬁle includes song data

and a song number.

Memory

Memory is a location inside

the Clavinova in which you

can save and edit data.

Character code

Type of characters

File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song ﬁles

(e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), and change the characters on

the screen.

The following parameters are provided for these operations:

Clavinova memory

The Clavinova has the following three types of memory:

• Current memory:

This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit

the currently-selected song before playback or recording.

• Preset song memory:

This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs.

• Storage memory:

This memory area enables you to save recorded songs.

When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song

memory, or Storage memory, into Current memory.

You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn

off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Stor-

age memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are

lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Stor-

age memory (see page 50, 51).

In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is

referred to as a “Current song,” and a song in Storage memory is a “Memory

song.”

TERMINOLOGY

Settings

Parameter

name

Reference

page

Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 50

Deletes song data from Clavinova memory DeleteSong 51

Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 52

Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 52

Clavinova

Preset song

memory

Storage memory

Current memory

CLP-970A 49

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Basic ﬁle operation

A message (information or conﬁrmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation.

Refer to the “Message List” on page 86 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and

troubleshooting information.

Procedure

1. Select a song.

Select a song you wish to save or rename.

2. Access the File menu.

Press the [FILE] button.

To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice.

3. Select the desired parameter.

Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired

item from the following:

“SaveToMemory”, “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”, “CharacterCode”.

4. Set the parameter or execute the command.

Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons.

For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corre-

sponding section below.

5. Close the File menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[FILE]

A B

C D

NO YES

50 CLP-970A

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage

memory...[SaveToMemory]

If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded

song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory. You can also save the preset songs and additional

or overwriting recordings (page 44) to Storage memory.

Procedure

See page 49 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure of Step 4.

4-1 Name the song.

To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons.

To insert a space, press the C [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously.

To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons.

To delete a character, press the D [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously.

You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer

than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and

scroll the name.

“Execute?→”: Do you wish

to execute the operation?

“Sure?→”: Are you sure?

“Executing”: The Clavinova

is executing the operation.

“Completed”: The operation

is complete.

4-2 Execute the operation.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→”

“Sure?

→.” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again

to conﬁrm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [–

(NO)] button.)

The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the opera-

tion. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears.

The song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” means

“Memory” and “xx” is a number.

Do not turn off the power

while the screen displays

“Executing.”

If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavi-

nova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them.

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

• You can change the type

of characters on the

screen using the Char-

acterCode parameter.

• When you select a saved

song later, the name with

an extension “.MID” will

appear.

TERMINOLOGY

CAUTION

TIP

CLP-970A 51

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory...

[DeleteSong]

To delete a Current song,

select “ALL” for the Channel-

Clear parameter in the

“SONG SETTING” menu

(page 69). Alternatively,

press the SONG SELECT

[ ]/[ ]

buttons simul-

taneously to display “Song

Changed Save?”. This

means “A song has been

edited. Do you wish to save

the change?” Press the B [–

(NO)] button. The Current

song is deleted and a blank

“NewSong” is selected.

You can delete Memory songs, but not Preset songs or Current songs.

Procedure

See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure of Step 4.

If you select a Memory

song, deleting the song

does not erase song data

from Current memory. How-

ever, if you return to the

song select screen, song

information other than the

song name is replaced by

“--------------”.

4-1 Select a song to delete.

Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song.

After you delete a song, the

Clavinova automatically

updates the song numbers.

Do not turn off the power

while the screen displays

“Executing.”

4-2 Execute the operation.

Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.”

Follow the instructions on screen.

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CAUTION

52 CLP-970A

Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]

Renaming a song...[RenameSong]

You can change a song’s title (except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong].

Procedure

Do not turn off the power

while the screen displays

“Executing.”

After you rename a song,

the Clavinova sorts songs

alphabetically and renum-

bers them.

See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed pro-

cedure for Step 4.

4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory]

section (page 50).

Changing the type of characters on screen...[Char-

acterCode]

You can change the type of characters that appear on screen.

The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.”

Options: International, Japanese

Character list

[International]

[Japanese]

A B

C D

NO YES

CAUTION

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-970A 53

Playing Back Recorded Songs

You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 39). You

can also play the keyboard along with the playback.

Playing back a song

Procedure

You can enjoy ensemble

performance by yourself.

Record the parts for a four-

handed song or a piano

duet, then play the recorded

part while playing the other

part on the keyboard.

1. Display the song select screen.

Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons.

Use the SongRepeat

parameter in the “SONG

SETTING” menu (page 70)

to select repeat playback of

all songs or repeat playback

of a single song.

2. Select the desired song.

2-1 Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “Pre-

setSong,” or “MemorySong.”

If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavi-

nova displays “MemorySong.”

2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons

to select a song.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

1 2-2 2-1

2-2

TEMPO [DOWN] [UP]

SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Song select screen

TIP

54 CLP-970A

Playing Back Recorded Songs

3. Start playback.

Press the [START/PAUSE] button.

Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Syn-

chro Start)

You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called

the “Synchro Start” function.

To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] but-

ton and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/PAUSE] indicator

ﬂashes.

Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously.

To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the

Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode.

Bar: measure

You can play the metronome

along with the song play-

back. When you stop play-

back, the metronome is also

stopped.

In the song select screen:

You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by

using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is

playing or stopped.

You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can

also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the

voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback

parts and your current performance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]

buttons. (See page 46.)

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

Adjusting the tempo

You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback

tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s

original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simul-

taneously.

Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song

select screen.

4. Stop playback.

When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and

locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song,

press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the

[START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button.

TERMINOLOGY

TIP

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the C[–]

button while playback is

stopped in the middle of

the song to locate the

top of the song.

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the C[–]

button during playback

to restart playback from

the top of the song.

• Press the SONG

SELECT [ ] or the

C[+] button during play-

back to start playback

from the next song.

A B

C D

NO YES

The bar number in playback

CLP-970A 55

Playing Back Recorded Songs

5. Return to the main screen.

Press the [EXIT] button.

Turning track playback on and off

You can practice a part or

phrase using the FromToRe-

peat (page 69) in the

“SONG SETTING” menu.

When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that con-

tain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While

the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the

indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track

buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned

off.

TIP

56 CLP-970A

Connections

Connectors

CAUTION

Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before

turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or

damage to the components may occur.

Do not route the output from

the AUX OUT jacks to the

AUX IN jacks. That is, when

you connect an external

audio device to the AUX

OUT jacks, do not connect

the audio device to the

Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If

you make this connection,

the signal input at the AUX

IN jacks is output from the

AUX OUT. This creates an

audio loop, causing audio

oscillation and abnormal

playback, leading to mal-

function of both pieces of

equipment.

Use audio cables and

adapter plugs with no resis-

tance.

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] slider setting

does not affect the signal

output from the AUX OUT

jacks.

1 AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks

You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a

cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below

and use audio cables for connection.

Adjust the volume level on the stereo system or cassette tape recorder, not

using the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio sys-

tem, ﬁrst turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system.

Reverse this order when you turn the power off.

MIDI

HOST SELECT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

TO HOST

AUX PEDAL

PEDAL

OUT INTHRU

L/L

AUX IN

L/L

AUX OUT

1 2 6

5 743

CAUTION

TIP

AUX OUT

AUX IN

L/L

AUX OUT

RCA phono plug

Clavinova

phone plug

(standard)

alternatively

RCA phono

→phone adapter plug

RCA phono plug

audio cable

cassette tape recorder

stereo system

CLP-970A 57

Connections

The Clavinova’s [MASTER

VOLUME] slider setting

affects the input signal from

the AUX IN jacks, but the

[REVERB], [CHORUS], and

[BRILLIANCE] (page 30) set-

tings do not.

If you connect the Clavi-

nova to a monaural device,

use only the AUX IN [L/L+R]

jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R]

jack.

2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks

The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks,

allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavi-

nova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connec-

tion.

CAUTION

When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, ﬁrst

turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order

when you turn the power off.

3 AUX PEDAL jack

Connect an optional foot controller FC7 or foot switch FC4 or FC5 here.

Using the FC7 enables you to add expression to your performance by control-

ling the volume level of the notes you play. Using the FC4 or FC5 enables you

to turn the assigned function on and off. Use the AuxPedal parameter in the

“VOICE SETTING” menu. You can also assign the [START/PAUSE] button

function to this foot switch. (See page 83.)

4 TO HOST jack

This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Con-

necting a personal computer” on page 58 for more information.)

5 HOST SELECT switch

This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or

personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58

for more information.)

TIP

AUX IN

Tone Generator

AUX OUT (OUTPUT)

L/L

AUX IN

Clavinova

phone plug

(standard)

audio cable

Plug shape depends

on the divece.

CLP-970A

Connections

MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors

Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors.

Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page)

to MIDI when you use these connectors.

PEDAL jack

Connect the pedal cord from the pedal box. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand

Assembly” on pages 96-98.)

Connecting a personal computer

You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI)

jack.

You can also play music data that conforms to the “GM System Level 1” and “XG” standards from the com-

puter’s sequence software.

There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer:

1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 59)

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 61)

3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface (page 62)

For more information, refer to the following pages.

When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, ﬁrst turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer

before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn

on the power to the computer ﬁrst, then to the Clavinova.

If you do not use the TO HOST jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left

connected, the Clavinova may not function properly.

When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST jack, but the MIDI connec-

tors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT

switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST jack since no data is transferred via the TO

HOST jack.

“The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what

you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer sys-

tem (the manual is not written for any speciﬁc models). The document is available as a PDF ﬁle (in

English) at the following Internet address:

Clavinova Web site:

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

Yamaha Manual Library

(Electronic Musical Instruments):

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

(For the Manual Library, you need to register ﬁrst. Check the Clavinovas [Digital Piano] web page.)

TIP

CLP-970A 59

Connections

1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack

Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack.

In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special

MIDI interface.

Connection

Use a special serial cable (page 60) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavi-

nova’s TO HOST jack.

TO HOST

Windows Windows Macintosh

HOST SELECT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

TO HOST

modem port

Clavinova

RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin)

Note for Windows 95/98 users (regarding MIDI driver)

To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a

speciﬁed MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows 95/98). You can download this driver from the

following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site:

http://www.yamaha-xg.com

60 CLP-970A

Connections

Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments

According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables.

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer.

• Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock)

• Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps)

If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different

settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data

transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.)

8 (CTS)

7 (RTS)

2 (RxD)

5 (GND)

3 (TxD)

• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin)

8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent)

mini DIN

8-pin

D-sub

9-pin

mini DIN

8-pin

2 (HSK i)

1 (HSK O)

5 (RxD-)

4 (GND)

3 (TxD-)

8 (RxD+)

7 (GP-)

6 (TxD+)

mini DIN

8-pin

• Macintosh

System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent)

mini DIN

8-pin

5 (CTS)

4 (RTS)

3 (RxD)

7 (GND)

2 (TxD)

D-sub

25-pin

• Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin)

8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 25-pin plug

(Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent)

mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin

Pin numbers (view from front)

D-sub 9-pin

1234567891011

14 15 16 17

45321

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

12 13

9876

• Pin assignment

The following diagram shows the pin assignments

for each cable.

TIP

CLP-970A 61

Connections

2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors

Connection

Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables.

Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting

Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

Windows Macintosh

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

OUT

MIDI

HOST SELECT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

OUT INTHRU

Clavinova

MIDI interface

62 CLP-970A

Connections

3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface

Connect the USB port of the computer to the UX256 using a USB cable, install the driver (that came

with the UX256) on the computer, and connect the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or

MIDI cables.

For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the UX256.

UX256: Yamaha USB-MIDI Interface.

Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable

Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using MIDI cables

UX256

HOST SELECT

PC-1

TO HOST

Mac

Clavinova

USB cable

computer

Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

USB cable

MIDI cables

Clavinova

UX256

MIDI

HOST SELECT

MIDI

OUT INTHRU

computer

POWER

MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

EFFECT

BRILLIANCE

VOICE

SETTING

CHORUSREVERBSTRINGS/

CHOIR

ORGAN

BASS

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

VOICE

E. PIANO/

BASS

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

SPLIT

POINT

HARPSI-

CHORD

HARPSI/

MALLET

CONTRASTB

YES

EXIT

TEMPO

METRONOME

UPDOWN

FILE

SONG

SETTING

SETTINGSTART/STOP

TRACK

SONG SELECTDEMO

TRANSPOSEMAX

MASTER VOLUME

MIN

CLP-970

SONG BALANCE

NEW SONG

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

STOP

SONG

SYNCHRO START

START/

PAUSE

REC

CLP-970A 63

Detailed Settings

CLP-970A 63

64 CLP-970A

Detailed Settings

You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as ﬁne tuning the pitch,

selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. See page 66 for the normal (default) setting for

each parameter.

Parameter List

The following parameters are available.

Recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

Metronome METRONOME [SETTING]

Voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Correcting note timing Quantize 68

Specifying whether playback starts immediately

along with the ﬁrst voicing

QuickPlay 69

Auditioning the channels ChannelListen 69

Deleting data by each channel ChannelClear 69

Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly FromToRepeat 69

Playing back a song repeatedly SongRepeat 70

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Metronome time signature TimeSignature 71

Metronome volume level MetronomeVolume 71

Metronome voice MetronomeSound 71

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Octave* Octave 72

Volume level* Volume 72

Position of right and left channels* Pan 73

Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Detune 73

Reverb type ReverbType 73

Reverb depth* ReverbSend 73

Chorus type ChorusType 74

Chorus depth* ChorusSend 74

Chorus on/off ChorusOnOff 74

Variation effect type VariationType 74

Variation effect depth* VariationSend 75

Touch sensitivity* TouchSense 75

CLP-970A 65

Detailed Settings

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

[OTHER SETTING]

Right pedal function RPedal 75

Center pedal function MPedal 76

Left pedal function LPedal 76

Auxiliary pedal function AuxPedal 76

Settings Parameter name Reference page

MIDI transmit channel MidiOutChannel 78

MIDI receive channel (Port A) MidiInAChannel 78

MIDI receive channel (Port B) MidiInBChannel 79

Local control on/off LocalControl 79

Selecting performance from the keyboard or song

data for MIDI transmission

MidiOutSelect 79

Type of data received via MIDI ReceiveParameter 79

Type of data transmitted via MIDI TransmitParameter 80

Song data bulk dump SongBulkDump 80

Transmitting the initial settings InitialSetup 80

Voice data bulk dump VoiceBulkDump 80

Settings Parameter name Reference page

Selecting a touch response TouchResponse 81

Fine tuning of the pitch Tune 81

Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice PianoTuningCurve 81

Selecting a scale Scale 82

Depth of string resonance StringResonanceDepth 82

Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal SustainSamplingDepth 82

Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect VivraphoneRotorSpeed 83

Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone VibraphonePedalMode 83

Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal PedalStart/Pause 83

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal AuxPedalType 83

Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts

to affect the sound

HalfPedalPoint 84

Pitch bend range PitchBendRange 84

Replacing the preset voices with XG voices XGAlternative 84

Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown MemoryBackUp 85

Restoring the normal (default) settings FactorySet 85

66 CLP-970A

Detailed Settings

Making detailed settings

Procedure

1. Access a setting menu.

Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], MET-

RONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [MIDI SETTING],

or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting

menu.

Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu.

2. Select the desired parameter or part.

Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] but-

tons repeatedly as required.

3. Set the parameter or part.

Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use

the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons

to select or set the option.

To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons

simultaneously.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[SONG SETTING]

[OTHER SETTING]

[MIDI SETTING]

[VOICE SETTING]

METRONOME [SETTING]

A [–] [+] B [–

(

)

] [+

(

YES

)

]

C [–] [+] D [–] [+]

CLP-970A 67

Detailed Settings

4. Write, execute, or save the data.

There are two ways to respond to the messages.

If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears:

Press the B [+(YES)] button to display conﬁrmation ([Sure?→]). To

proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays

“Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it

displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous

screen.

To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B

[+(YES)] button.

If “Set?→” appears:

Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova dis-

plays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete,

it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previ-

ous screen.

5. Close the setting menu.

Press the [EXIT] button.

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

68 CLP-970A

Detailed settings for recording

and playback [SONG SETTING]

You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”),

or memory songs (“MemorySong”) (see page 53).

Procedure

Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu.

You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you

can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth

notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively

(with a swing type of rhythm).

• Changes are made by song.

• You can also listen to the sound while changing the

setting. To change the data, you need to respond to

“Execute?

→.”

See the procedure on page 66.

Notes for which you can adjust the timing:

If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavi-

nova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to

make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging.

Setting range:

0% - 100%

If you select “1/8” for correction:

Save the edited song data to memory. (See page 48.)

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[SONG SETTING]

Correcting note timing [Quantize]

A B

C D

NO YES

Specifies the type of note.

Stores the changed value.

[OFF]

[1/4]

[1/8]

[1/16]

[1/12]

[1/24]

quarter note

eighth note

sixteenth note

eighth note triplets

sixteenth note triplets

3 3

Performance data

Swing rate = 50% : not swinging

Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) :

The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed.

Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) :

The timing of even beat notes is slightly early.

Swing rate = 67% :

The timing of the even beat notes is moved to

the third beat of the triplets.

TIP

CLP-970A 69

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

This parameter enables you to specify whether a song

that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a

silence prior to the ﬁrst note, should be played from

the ﬁrst note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank).

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

[On] Playing from the ﬁrst note

[Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest

or blank)

You can select a single channel to listen to its contents.

Playback starts from the ﬁrst note.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16

Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.

You can delete data from each of 16 channels.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels)

• Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed.

• Save the edited song data to memory. (See page 48.)

You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to

play back repeatedly.

• Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat

speciﬁed as the end point.

• If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On”

selected, the count down starts, followed by the

repeated playback of the speciﬁed part until you

press the [STOP] button.

• If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts.

See the procedure on page 66.

When you select another song, the speciﬁed range is auto-

matically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off.

Specifying whether playback

starts immediately along with the

ﬁrst voicing [QuickPlay]

Auditioning the channels [Chan-

nelListen]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons to select the desired channel

for playback.

Playback continues as long

as you press and hold down this button.

TIP

Deleting data from each channel

[ChannelClear]

Specifying the range and playing

back repeatedly [FromToRepeat]

A B

C D

NO YES

Press this button to delete data.

Use these buttons to select the desired channel

for deletion.

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons

to specify the end point

of the repeated range.

Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.”

Use these buttons

to specify the start point

of the repeated range.

NOTE

70 CLP-970A

Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]

You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song

selected from the 50 preset songs or from memory

songs.

• When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the

song you selected using the front panel, then starts

repeat playback of the speciﬁed songs until you press

the [STOP] button.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

[MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory

[PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs

[ALL] All songs from “MemorySongs,” and

“PresetSongs”

[OneSong] One song selected from the front

panel

Playing back a song repeatedly

[SongRepeat]

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs.

Use these buttons to select “On.”

CLP-970A 71

Detailed settings for the metro-

nome METRONOME [SETTING]

You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome.

Procedure

Press the [METRONOME SETTING] button to access the Metro-

nome Setting menu.

See the procedure on page 66.

For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons

to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.”

Setting range for the numerator:

1 - 16

Setting options for the denominator:

2, 4, and 8

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

0-127

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

[BellOff] Click (standard metronome sound)

[EnglishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English

[GermanVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German

[JapaneseVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese

[FrenchVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French

[SpanishVoice] Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish

[BellOn] Click and bell

To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.”

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

METRONOME [SETTING]

Setting the metronome time sig-

nature [TimeSignature]

Setting the metronome volume

level [MetronomeVolume]

A B

C D

NO YES

Use these buttons

to set the denominator

of the time signature.

Use these buttons

to set the numerator

of the time signature.

A B

C D

NO YES

Selecting the metronome voice

[MetronomeSound]

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

72 CLP-970A

Detailed settings for the voices

[VOICE SETTING]

This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can

make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play

on the keyboard while changing the settings.

Procedure

1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the

“Voice Setting” menu.

2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to

change the voice.

The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice.

[Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode)

[Main

× Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual

mode)

[Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode)

[Left

× Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode)

In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually.

You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps.

See the procedure on page 66.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

–2 (two octaves lower - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two

octaves higher)

You can set the volume level for each voice part.

See the procedure on page 66.

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[VOICE SETTING]

TIP

Setting the octave [Octave]*

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Setting the volume level

[Volume]*

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-970A 73

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You can specify the position in the stereo image from

which you hear the sound.

See the procedure on page 66.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right)

You can slightly shift the pitch of two voices selected

for Dual mode.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

–20 - +20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is

raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With nega-

tive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch

of Voice 2 is raised.)

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and

“LeftXLayer.”

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Room Simulates reverberation in a room.

Hall Simulates reverberation in a concert hall.

Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of

“Hall1.”

Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument

sound.

Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal

plate.

The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter

is set to “0.”

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting the position of right and

left channels [Pan]*

Fine tuning the pitch (only in

Dual mode) [Detune]

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2)

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

A B

C D

NO YES

Selecting the reverb type

[ReverbType]

Setting the reverb depth

[ReverbSend]*

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

74 CLP-970A

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and

“Left

× Layer.”

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Chorus Adds a rich, spacious sound.

Celeste Adds swell and a spacious sound.

Flanger Adds swell effects of an ascending or

descending jet plane.

See the procedure on page 66.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each

voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off set-

ting for the voice automatically changes according to

this parameter.

Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is dis-

abled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

On/Off

You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus).

See the procedure on page 66.

Selecting the chorus type [Chorus

Type]

Setting the chorus depth [Cho-

rusSend]*

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Setting the chorus on/off

[ChorusOnOff]

Selecting the variation effect

type [VariationType]

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-970A 75

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

Setting range:

DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right

positions.

DelayLR Delay applied at left and right posi-

tions.

Echo Echo-like delay

CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed.

Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect.

RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary

speaker.

Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid

cycles.

VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone.

AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back

and forth.

Phaser The phase changes periodically,

swelling the sound.

AutoWah The center frequency of the wah ﬁlter

changes periodically.

SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a

piano soundboard.

Off No effect.

See the procedure on page 66.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 - 127

This parameter enables determines the manner and

degree to which the volume level changes in response

to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play).

Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe

organs do not change regardless of how you play the

keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127.

(See the setting range below.)

See the procedure on page 66.

In Dual mode:

Setting range:

0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127

(loudest and ﬁxed)

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

SustainCont Damper function that sustains the

sound longer as you press the pedal

deeper.

Sustain On/Off switch type damper function.

PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously.

Off No function.

Normal setting:

SustainCount

Setting the variation effect depth

[VariationSend]*

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

Setting the touch sensitivity

[TouchSense]*

Setting the right pedal function

[RPedal]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2)

A B

C D

NO YES

76 CLP-970A

Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 29.)

RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the

rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice.

(Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles

between fast and slow rotation speeds.)

VibeRotor Turns vibrato of the Vibraphone voice

on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeat-

edly toggles between on and off.)

Off No function.

Normal Setting:

Sostenuto

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 29.)

RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the

rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice.

(Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles

between fast and slow rotation speeds.)

VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone

voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal

repeatedly toggles between on and off.)

Off No function.

Normal Setting:

Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and Vibra-

Phone)

Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor)

You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the

Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Expression Makes the sound softer or louder.

Sustain On/Off switch type damper function.

(See page 29.)

SustainCont Damper function that sustains the

sound longer as you press the pedal

deeper. (See page 29.)

PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously.

Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 29.)

Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 29.)

RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the

rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan

voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles

between fast and slow rotation speeds.)

VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone

voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal

repeatedly toggles between on and off.)

Off No function.

Normal setting:

Expression

Optional pedals

• Yamaha FC7 foot controller

This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression,

SustainCont, and PitchBend.

• Yamaha FC4 foot controller

Yamaha FC5 foot controller

These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain,

Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, and VibeRotor.

Setting the center pedal function

[MPedal]

Setting the left pedal function

[LPedal]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Setting the auxiliary pedal func-

tion [AuxPedal]

A B

C D

NO YES

TIP

CLP-970A 77

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels.

About MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the

transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers.

Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a con-

nected MIDI device or computer.

You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play

“GM System Level 1” or “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A, and control it from a connected com-

puter or sequencer.

MIDI connectors

MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data.

MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data.

MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is.

Prepare dedicated MIDI cables.

[TO HOST] connector

Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer.

The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Per-

sonal Computer” on page 58 for more information.

MIDI

HOST SELECT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

OUT INTHRU

TIP

HOST SELECT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

TO HOST

TIP

MIDI performance data and

commands are transferred in

the form of numeric values.

Since MIDI data that can be

transmitted or received var-

ies depending on the type of

MIDI device, check the “MIDI

Implementation Chart” to ﬁnd

out what MIDI data and com-

mands your devices can

transmit or receive. The Clavi-

nova’s MIDI Implementation

Chart is listed on pages 29

and 30 in the “Reference

Booklet” for the CLP-970A.

When you are using the

MIDI connectors, set the

[HOST SELECT] switch to

“MIDI.” (See page 58.)

When you are using the [TO

HOST] connector, set the

[HOST SELECT] switch cor-

rectly, according to the type

of computer you are using.

(See page 58.)

You can also obtain detailed

information about MIDI from

various music magazines

and books.

TIP

78 CLP-970A

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

Procedure

Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode.

This parameter enables you to specify the channel on

which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting for:

Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer

Setting range:

Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.)

Normal setting:

Main — Ch1

Left — Ch2

Layer — Ch3

Left Layer— Ch4

This parameter enables you to specify for each channel

whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN]

connector or the [TO HOST] port A (CBX driver’s

port A).

The received data is played back using the XG voices (page

6 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970A). You can also

assign the Clavinova’s preset voices to part of the data. (See

“XG Alternative” on page 84.)

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting for:

Ch1 - Ch16

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all channels

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[MIDI SETTING]

Setting the MIDI transmit chan-

nel [MidiOutChannel]

Setting the MIDI receive channel

(Port A) [MidiInAChannel]

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a voice part. Specify the channel.

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a channel. Select On or Off.

MIDI IN

TO HOST

Sound source A

Channels 1-16

Port A Port B

Sound source B

Channels 1-16

MIDI data

Used for song playback

Used for performance

and playback

CLP-970A 79

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

This parameter enables you to specify for each channel

whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN]

connector or the [TO HOST] port B (CBX driver’s

port B).

The received data is played back using the preset voices

(page 93).

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting for:

Ch1 - Ch16

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all channels

“Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova

produces the sound from its tone generator when you

play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off” state, the

keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each

other. This means that even if you play the keyboard,

the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the

keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a con-

nected MIDI device, which can produce the sound.

The “Local Control Off” setting is useful when you

wish to play an external sound source while playing the

keys on the Clavinova.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

You can select whether your performance data or song

playback data (including demo songs) is sent via

MIDI.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Keyboard (performance data played on the keyboard)

Song (song playback data)

Normal setting:

Keyboard

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI

data the Clavinova can receive.

See the procedure on page 66.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System

Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

Setting the MIDI receive channel

(Port B) [MidiInAChannel]

Setting Local control on/off

[LocalControl]

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a channel. Select On or Off.

A B

C D

NO YES

Selecting performance from the

keyboard or song data for MIDI

transmission [MidiOutSelect]

Selecting a type of data received

via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a type of data. Select On or Off.

80 CLP-970A

MIDI [MIDI SETTING]

This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI

data the Clavinova can transmit.

See the procedure on page 66.

Type of data:

Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime,

SysEx (System Exclusive)

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

On for all types of data

You can save current song data on the Clavinova as

MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI

data ﬁler (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play

back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from

the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the

usual playback procedure.

You can interrupt song data bulk dump transmission

by pressing the B [– (NO)] button.

See the procedure on page 66.

You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selec-

tion, to a connected sequencer. Before you record per-

formance data to a connected MDF3 or sequencer, it is

useful if you ﬁrst send and record (at the beginning of

the performance data) the panel setup data for your

performance during playback.

See the procedure on page 66.

You can transmit the voice data speciﬁed in the “Voice

Setting” menu (page 72) as MIDI bulk data. You can

interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by press-

ing the B [– (NO)] button.

See the procedure on page 66.

Selecting a type of data transmit-

ted via MIDI [TransmitParameter]

Executing song data bulk dump

[SongBulkDump]

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a type of data. Select On or Off.

A B

C D

NO YES

Transmitting the initial settings

on the panel [InitialSetup]

Executing voice data bulk dump

[VoiceBulkDump]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-970A 81

Other settings

You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc.

Procedure

Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode.

You can specify a touch response (how the sound

responds to the way you play the keys).

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Light With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a

loud sound. The volume level of tones tends

to be consistent.

Medium Standard touch response.

Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a

loud volume. This allows for versatile expres-

sion, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones.

Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be

the same regardless of how hard you play the

keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the vol-

ume level.

Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level:

1 - 127

You can ﬁne tune the pitch of the entire instrument.

This function is useful when you play the Clavinova

along with other instruments or CD music.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps)

You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and

“GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning

curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of

other instruments voices.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Stretch Tuning curve particularly for pianos

Flat Tuning curve in which the frequency is

octave doubled over the entire keyboard

range

DEMO SONG SELECT

TRANSPOSE

MASTER VOLUME

TEMPO VOICE EFFECT

SONG

CLP-970

MIN MAX

NEW SONG

SONG BALANCE

UPDOWN

BRILLIANCE

TRACK

EXTRA

TRACKS

FILE METRONOME

CONTRAST

SONG

SETTING

START/ STOP SETTING

SPLIT

POINT

VOICE

SETTING

REVERB

CHORUS MIDI

SETTING

OTHER

SETTING

REC

PIANO

MAIN

LEFT

E. PIANO/

BASS

HARPSI-

CHORD

MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR

STOP

START/

PAUSE

SYNCHRO START

EXIT

PIANO/

E. PIANO

HARPSI/

MALLET

ORGAN/

STRINGS

BASS

A B

C D

NO YES

[OTHER SETTING]

Selecting a touch response

[TouchResponse]

A B

C D

NO YES

Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]

Selecting a tuning curve for a

piano voice [PianoTuningCurve]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

82 CLP-970A

Other settings

You can select various scales.

Equal Temperament is the most common contempo-

rary piano tuning scale. However, history has known

numerous other scales, many of which serve as the

basis for certain genres of music. You can experience

the tunings of these genres.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal inter-

vals. Currently most popular piano tuning

scale.

PureMajor/PureMinor

Based on natural overtones, three major chords

using these scales produce a beautiful, pure

sound. They are sometimes used for chorus

parts.

Pythagorean

This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek

philosopher, is composed of only ﬁve pitches.

The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th

are beautiful and suitable for some leads.

MeanTone

This scale is an improvement of the

Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has

been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th

century through the late 18th century. Handel

used this scale.

WerckMeister/KirnBerger

These scales combine Mean Tone and

Pythagorean in different ways. With these

scales, modulation changes the impression and

feel of the songs. They were often used in the

era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often

used now to reproduce the music of that era on

harpsichords.

Normal setting:

Equal

If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to spec-

ify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons.

Setting range:

C, C

, D, E

, E, F, F

, G, A

, A, B

, B

This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.”

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

1 - 10, Off

This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.”

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

1 - 10, Off

Selecting a scale [Scale]

A B

C D

NO YES

Depth of string resonance

[StringResonanceDepth]

Depth of sustain sampling for the

damper pedal [SustainSam-

plingDepth]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

CLP-970A 83

Other settings

This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato

when you select the Vibraphone voice and use a vibe

rotor pedal.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

1 - 10, Off

This parameter enables you to select whether the

sound is sustained while you press the keys on the key-

board (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only

while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like

playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”).

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

PianoLike, Normal

Normal setting:

PianoLike

If you assign the START/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn

the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in

the Voice Setting menu (pages 75 and 76) is disabled.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting for:

Left, Middle, AUX

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

Off for all pedals

A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector

may switch on and off differently. For example, some

pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off

when you press them.

Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

Make, Break

Setting the speed of vibraphone’s

vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotor-

Speed]

Selecting a pedal function for

vibraphone

[VibraphonePedalMode]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Assigning the START/PAUSE func-

tion to a pedal [PedalStart/

Pause]

Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal

[AuxPedalType]

TIP

A B

C D

NO YES

Select a pedal to assign the function. Set to On or Off.

A B

C D

NO YES

84 CLP-970A

Other settings

You can specify how far down you should press on the

right pedal until the damper effect (page 29) starts

working. This setting is effective when the right pedal

function (page 75) is set to either SustainCont or Sus-

tain.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

–2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effec-

tive with the deepest press)

This parameter enables you to set the range of continu-

ous pitch change made by the Pitch Bend function.

• This parameter is effective only on the keyboard

performance sound.

• You can set the range in semitone steps.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting range:

–12 (Pitch is lowered by 12 semitones [one octave]

when you press the pedal.) - +12 (Pitch is raised by 12

semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.)

Normal setting:

–2

You can connect your computer or sequencer to the

MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to

play “GM System Level 1” or “XG”-conformed music

data on the CLP-970A, and control it from a connected

computer or sequencer.

The CLP-970A provides the XG tone generator for the

purpose of playing GM or XG music data. You can

replace some XG voices with the preset voices on the

panel for playback. This parameter enables you to

select “Native” (using the preset voices) or “XG” (using

the XG voices).

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting for:

All preset voices on the panel

Setting range:

Native Using the preset voices

XG Using the XG voices

Normal setting:

GrandPiano1 Native (using the preset voices)

Other voices XG (using the XG voices)

Setting the point at which the

damper pedal starts to affect the

sound [HalfPedalPoint]

Pitch bend range

[PitchBendRange]

A B

C D

NO YES

A B

C D

NO YES

Replacing the XG voices with pre-

set voices [XGAlternative]

A B

C D

NO YES

Select the desired item. Select on or off.

CLP-970A 85

Other settings

You can back up some settings, such as voice selection

and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost

after you turn off the power to the Clavinova.

• Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory),

the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting),

and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting

(page 52) are always backed up.

See the procedure on page 66.

Setting for:

Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/

LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, SongBal-

ance, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting

Setting range:

On/Off

Normal setting:

The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, and MetronomeSet-

ting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set

to On.

You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory

default) settings.

• The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File

menu does not change.

• The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/Off)

(left column) is reset to the normal setting.

• You can specify whether the memory songs are

erased or kept.

See the procedure on page 66.

Selecting for “MemorySong”:

MemorySongExcluded Memory songs are kept.

MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are erased.

Press and hold down the white key on the right end

(C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the

power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs

saved in the storage memory are not erased.

If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press

and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and

black key (B

6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn

on the power to the Clavinova.

Selecting items saved at shut-

down [MemoryBackUp]

A B

C D

NO YES

Select the desired item. Select on or off.

Restoring the normal (default)

settings [FactorySet]

Other method for restoring the

normal settings

A B

C D

NO YES

Reset the Clavinova.

Select a value for memory songs.

[POWER]

86 CLP-970A

Message List

The messages are listed in alphabetical order.

Message Meaning

This message is displayed following the message “BulkDataReceiving Song/

Voice.” Receiving bulk data is complete. After this message appears, you can

proceed to the next step.

Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again.

The Clavinova is receiving the song bulk data while this message is dis-

played. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step.

The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is

displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step.

You have cancelled the “SongBulkDump” (page 80) or “VoiceBulkDump”

(page 80) transmission by pressing the B [–(NO)] button.

This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavi-

nova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step.

You tried to save a song by changing its title (using the “RenameSong” (page

52), or “SaveToMemory” (page 50), but a song with the same name already

exists in memory. Three seconds after this message appears, the previous

screen is restored. Rename the song.

This message prompts you to execute a ﬁle-related operation. Press the B [+

(YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel.

The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message dis-

appears, then proceed to the next step.

The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting)

(“FactorySet” on page 85) have been restored. This message also appears if

you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova

(page 85).

CLP-970A 87

Message List

Message Meaning

The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting)

(“FactorySet” on page 85) have been restored. This message also appears if

you press and hold down the C7 and B

6 keys and turn on the power to the

Clavinova (page 85).

The Clavinova’s ﬂash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your

Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the

songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the pre-

vious screen.

You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to

storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power.

The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered.

This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemo-

rySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the stor-

age memory as much as possible.

This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemo-

rySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in

the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted.

There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs.

Delete some songs in the storage memory (page 51), then save new data to

memory.

You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory. You

cannot delete the song.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the exist-

ing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+

(YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.

You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after

you select the song. Wait until the message disappears.

This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited set-

tings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] but-

ton to cancel.

88 CLP-970A

Message List

Message Meaning

You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to

storage memory. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be

lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the

recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the

“SaveToMemory” (page 50) parameter screen. Save the recorded song, then

proceed to another operation.

The Clavinova has found some defects in the selected (or playing) song.

Select the song and play it again. If you still see this message, the song data

may be damaged.

The Current memory space is full during recording. Recording stops automat-

ically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also appears

when you try to enter recording mode to make an additional recording but the

song data already ﬁlls the Current memory. In this case, you cannot make an

additional recording. Use the “ChannelClear” parameter (page 69) to delete

unnecessary tracks (if any) to make more room in memory.

This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+

(YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation.

This message prompts you to conﬁrm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)]

button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel.

There is a malfunction with the TO HOST connector.

When you are using the CLP-970A with a connected computer:

The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incor-

rectly, the [HOST SELECT] switch is set incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI

application on the computer works incorrectly. Turn off the power to the

CLP-970A and the computer, then check the cable connections and the

[HOST SELECT] switch setting. Then, turn on the power to the computer

and the CLP-970A in this order and check to see if the driver and MIDI

application on the computer work properly.

When you are using only the CLP-970A:

This message appears if a cable is connected to the TO HOST connector on

the CLP-970A. In this case, turn off the power to the CLP-970A, remove the

cable from the TO HOST connector, then turn on the power to the CLP-

970A. If the cable is left connected to the TO HOST connector, the CLP-

970A may not work correctly.

You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to

change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by

the CLP-970A, and the CLP-970A could not process the name. The Clavinova

displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly.

CLP-970A 89

Questions about Operations

and Functions

■ The buttons do not respond.

While you are using a function, some buttons not

used for the function are disabled. If the song is

playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the

[EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then,

perform the desired operation.

■

The sound sustains and does not decay when I

press the sostenuto pedal.

With the voices in the ORGAN or STRINGS/

CHOIR group, the sound continues sustaining

while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal.

■

Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly

when the transpose or octave setting is made.

The setting range for the transposition and octave

setting is C2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the

Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A1 - C7.) If

the lowest key is set to a note lower than C2, it will

produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest

key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a

sound one octave lower.

■

How can I return to the recording or song select

screen during song recording or playback?

Press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] or [ ] but-

tons once.

■

The tempo does not change even though I

recorded with tempo changes.

Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the

changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case,

the recording will be played back at the original

tempo.

Make tempo changes when the recording track is

selected and a red track indicator is ﬂashing. The

same trick applies to editing the tempo after record-

ing.

■

Performance in Dual or Split mode is not

recorded.

Track data is lost unexpectedly.

For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording

track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the

left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 46).

Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will

be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to

Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song

is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played

with the second voice (or the notes lower than the

Split point) are not recorded.

■

What type of data is recorded?

Data recorded in the tracks:

• Note data (notes you play)

• Voice selection

• Clavinova pedals and external pedals on/off

• Reverb depth “ReverbSend”

• Chorus depth “ChorusSend”

• Variation effect depth “VariationSend”

• Voice octave setting “Octave”

• Voice volume level “Volume”

• Stereo image of each voice “Pan”

• Fine tuning of two voice pitch (Dual mode)

“Detune”

• Volume level changes for each voice with

response to the way you play “TouchSense”

Data recorded globally in all tracks:

•Tempo

• Time signature

•Reverb type

• Chorus type

• Variation effect type

You can change all data except for note data after record-

ing.

You can change the time signature at the beginning of the

song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by

using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped.

90 CLP-970A

Questions about Operations and Functions

■ I cannot change the key signature in the song

after recording.

Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the

song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the mea-

sure in which you wish to change the key signature,

then change it.

■

How much data can I record?

• Current memory (page 48): About 600KB

• Storage memory (page 48): About 750KB

■

The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the

AUX PEDAL jack is reversed.

Some types of pedals may turn on and off in oppo-

site fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter

(page 83) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to

change the external pedal setting.

■

The song title is not correct.

The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than

that used when you named the song. Also, if the

song was recorded on another instrument, the title

might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “Character-

Code” parameter (page 52) in the FILE menu to

change the setting.

■

What is the difference between “TouchSense”

and “TouchResponse” MIDI data?

“TouchSense” determines the manner and degree

to which the volume level changes in response to

your touch on the keyboard. It causes MIDI exclu-

sive data (that controls the tone generator) to be

output.

“TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity

as an instrument and causes MIDI note-on velocity

data to be output.

CLP-970A 91

Appendix

CLP-970A 91

92 CLP-970A

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Solution

The Clavinova does not turn on.

The Clavinova has not been

plugged in properly.

Securely insert the female plug into

the socket on the Clavinova, and

the male plug into a proper AC out-

let. (See page 17.)

A click or pop is heard when the

power is turned on or off.

Electrical current is being applied to

the instrument.

This is normal, and is no cause for

concern.

Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s

speakers.

The noise may be due to interfer-

ence caused by the use of a mobile

phone in close proximity to the

Clavinova.

Turn off the mobile phone, or use it

further away from the Clavinova.

The overall volume is low, or no

sound is heard.

The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too

low.

Raise the [MASTER VOLUME]

level. (See page 18.)

Headphones are connected.

Unplug the headphones. (See page

18.)

The Local Control function is turned

off.

Turn the Local Control function on.

(See page 79.)

The damper pedal has no effect, or

the sound continuously sustains

even when the damper pedal is not

pressed.

The pedal cord plug is not con-

nected.

Securely insert the pedal cord plug

into the proper jack. (See step 5 on

page 97.)

The pitch and/or tone of the piano

voices in certain ranges do not

sound right.

The Clavinova’s piano voices

attempt to precisely simulate actual

piano sounds. However, as a result

of sampling algorithms, overtones

in some ranges may sound exag-

gerated, producing a somewhat dif-

ferent pitch or tone.

This is normal.

Mechanical noise is heard during

performance.

The Clavinova’s keyboard mecha-

nism simulates the keyboard mech-

anism of a piano. Mechanical noise

is also heard on a piano.

This is normal.

CLP-970A 93

Preset Voice List

Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

GrandPiano1 ● ● ● ● ●

This voice has been sampled from a full con-

cert grand piano. It features ﬁve-stage dynamic

sampling, tone changes with damper pedal

operation, and a subtle voicing at the release

of the keys. It simulates the ultimate acoustic

piano sound. It also reproduces a string reso-

nance that is typical of acoustic pianos. This

voice is suitable not only for classical music but

for piano music of any genre.

GrandPiano2 ● ●

×××

A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal

for rock and popular genres.

E.Piano1 ● ● ●

××

An electronic piano sound created by FM syn-

thesis. Extremely “musical” response with vary-

ing timbre according to keyboard dynamics.

E.Piano2

● ● ●

The sound of an electric piano using hammer-

struck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played

lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard.

SynthPiano

●

×××

This voice simulates the electric piano sound

produced by synthesizers in popular music. It

also goes well with the acoustic piano sound.

WoodBass ● ● ● ●

This voice simulates the sound of an upright

bass played with the ﬁngers, and is suitable for

jazz and Latin music. Stereo sampling has

improved the acoustic feel.

ElectricBass

● ●

××

Electric bass for a wide range of music styles,

jazz, rock, popular, and more.

Bass&Cymbal ● ● ●

××

WoodBass sound and stereo-sampled cymbal

sound are layered. This voice is very effective

for a jazz walking bass.

Harpsichord8' ●

××

●

The harpsichord is often used for Baroque

music. The volume level is always consistent

regardless of how you play. The instrument

generates a peculiar voice when you release

the keys. “8’” means that it produces the same

octave sound as the keys.

Harpsichord8'+4' ●

××

●

This voice combines the 8’ and 4’ harpsichord

sounds. “4’” means that it produces a sound

one octave higher than the actual keys.

ElectricClavichord

●

This is the voice of a keyboard that produces

sound by striking the strings with magnetic

pickups. This funky sound is popular in black

contemporary music. Because of its unique

structure, the instrument produces a peculiar

sound when you release the keys.

Vibraphone ● ● ●

××

This voice simulates a vibraphone played with a soft mallet.

The harder you play, the more metallic it sounds. Use the

“VibraphonePedalMode” parameter in the “OTHER SET-

TING” menu to select whether the sound sustains while

you hold down the keys, or the sound sustains only when

you press the pedal. An actual vibraphone has a rotor

inside the resonance tube, which rotates via the motor to

create the vibrato effect. Pressing the left pedal applies this

effect; pressing the pedal again turns the effect off.

94 CLP-970A

Preset Voice List

Voice name

Stereo

sampling

Touch

Sense

Dynamic

sampling

Key-off

samples

String

resonance

Voice description

Marimba ● ● ●

××

This voice simulates a concert-type marimba

sound. Stereo sampling helps reproduce a real

acoustic spread.

Celesta ● ● ●

××

A celesta is a percussive instrument. When

you play the keyboard, the hammer hits a

metallic board to produce the sound. This

instrument is famous for the impressive sound

in “Dance of the Suger-Plum Fairy” of The Nut-

cracker Suite by Tchaikovsky.

PipeOrganPrincipal ●

××××

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument)

organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music.

PipeOrganFlute1 ●

××××

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4') of a ﬂute (woodwind instrument) organ.

Its soft sound is suitable for the accompani-

ment of hymns.

PipeOrganFlute2 ●

××××

This voice features the combination of pipes

(8'+4'+1 1/3') of a ﬂute organ. It sounds more

brilliant than PipeOrganFlute1 and is suitable

for solo performance.

PipeOrganTutti ●

××××

This voice features a full coupler of a pipe

organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta

and Fugue by Bach.

JazzOrgan

×××××

The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ.

Often heard in jazz and rock idioms.

Strings ● ●

×××

This voice features a string ensemble that

accurately simulates all string instruments,

including contrabass, cello, viola, and violin.

SynthStrings ● ●

×××

Sampled strings, processed for spread and

warmth. This voice is suitable for a pad in

ensemble music.

SlowStrings ● ●

×××

This voice features a string ensemble sound

with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with

piano or electric piano.

Choir ● ●

×××

A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating

rich harmonies in slow pieces.

SlowChoir ● ●

×××

This voice features a chorus sound with a slow

attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or

electric piano.

Scat ● ● ●

××

You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice.

Depending on how hard and what note range

you play, different sounds will be produced.

CLP-970A 95

Voice Combination Examples

(Dual and Split)

Dual

Split

Dual + Split

MAIN + MAIN

GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1

GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2

This combination is often used in popular music.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound.

MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2

This combination sounds as if you are playing

two notes that are two octaves apart. It is suit-

able for the accompaniment of Salsa music.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir This is suitable for romantic ballads.

MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + ElectricClavichord

This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul

music.

MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings

This combination is very suitable for Baroque

music.

MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs

This combination adds strings and bell sound. A

delay effect is automatically applied.

MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano1 / WoodBass

or Bass&Cymbal

This is recommended for light Jazz music. The

damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned

to the right-hand range.

MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir

This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute

song.

MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1

Play these voices elegantly along with piano

arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords

would be more effective.

MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass

This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz

chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding

a variety of expressions.

MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat

Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create

an interesting sound.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano1 + SynthString /

GrandPiano1

This combination creates the thick sound of a

layered piano and strings.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT

GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 /

ElectricBass

This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb

and chorus (pages 73 and 74) will improve the

groove. The damper pedal is effective on the

voice assigned to the right-hand range.

MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT

Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings /

Harpsichord8' + Strings

This combination makes a very brilliant sound.

CLP-970A

CLP-970A/970AM/970AC:

Keyboard Stand Assembly

CAUTION

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accor-

dance with the sequence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit.

• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustra-

tion will be used. Follow the assembly instructions

and select the parts as needed.

Attach the side panels to the pedal box.

Place the plastic bag that contained the side

panels on the ﬂoor when assembling the stand

to prevent scratches to the ﬂoor or stand.

Attach the rear panel.

Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready.

6 x 25 mm

round-head screws x4

4 x 12 mm

round-head screws x2

Cord holders x 2

6 x 16 mm

flat-head screws x4

4 x 20 mm

tapping screws x4

Assembly Parts

pedal box

rear panel

side

panel

(left)

side

panel

(right)

Bundled pedal cord inside

AC power cord

main unit

side panel

(right)

side panel

(left)

(1) Untie and straighten out the

bundled cord attached to the

bottom of the pedal box.

Don’t discard the vinyl tie,

you’ll need it later in step 6.

(2) Use the four long

round-head

screws 1 to

attach the pedal

box. First attach

one side panel,

then attach the

other side panel.

Make sure the

indented surface on

the side panel and the

rear surface on the

pedal box will match

correctly, without

creating a step.

(1) With the rear

panel on the

feet’s

protruding

edge, align the

panel with the

groove and

secure the top

of the panel.

(3) Secure the

bottom of the

rear panel to the

pedal box using

four tapping

screws 4.

(2) Secure the top of the

rear panel to the side

panel brackets using

two thin round-head

screws 3.

CLP-970A 97

CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly

3. Mount the main unit.

4. Fix the main unit.

5. Connect the pedal cord.

6. Secure the pedal cord.

7. Set the voltage selector and connect

the power cord.

CAUTION

• Fingers can become pinched between the main

unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful

so as not to drop the main unit.

• Do not hold the keyboard in any position other

than the position shown in the above illustration.

Be sure to place your hands at least

10 centimeters from either end of the

main unit when positioning it.

at least

10 cm

(2) Use short flat-head screws 2 to

secure the main unit from the

front.

* Use the rear hole on the front

brackets to attach the screws.

(1) Center the main unit to produce equal clearance

on the left and right sides.

(1) Pass the pedal cord plug

from the rear as shown,

and insert the plug into the

PEDAL jack.

(2) Use a vinyl tie to

take up any slack in

the pedal cord.

(1) Attach the cord

holders to the rear

panel as shown, then

clip the cord into the

holders.

Voltage Selector

Before connecting the

AC power cord, check

the setting of the

voltage selector which

is provided in some

areas. To set the

selector for 110V, 127V,

220V or 240V main

voltages, use a “minus”

screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct

voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the

panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is

initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC

power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug

adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the

pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

CAUTION

• An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage

to the Clavinova or result in improper operation.

CLP-970A

CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly

Set the adjuster.

After completing the assembly, please check the

following.

• Are there any parts left over?

• Review the assembly procedure and correct any

errors.

• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable

ﬁxtures?

• Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when

you shake it?

• Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you

step on the pedals?

• Turn the adjuster so that it is set ﬁrmly against the

ﬂoor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely

into the sockets?

• Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady

when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assem-

bly diagrams and retighten all screws.

Rotate the adjuster until it comes in

firm contact with the floor surface.

Speaker box

Key cover

When moving the instrument after assembly,

always hold the bottom of the main unit.

Do not hold the keyboard cover or speaker box.

Improper handling can result in damage to the

instrument or personal injury.

CLP-970A 99

Index

You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words.

The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column.

Numerics

50 greats for the Clavinova 13

50 Piano Preset Songs 24

Practicing a one-hand part 26

Adding reverberation to the sound

→ REVERB 31

Adding variation to the sound

→ Effect function 30

Assembly 96

Assigning the START/PAUSE

function to a pedal 83

AUX IN jacks 57

AUX OUT jacks 56

AUX PEDAL jacks 57

Auxiliary pedal function 76

BackUp 85

Bench 13

BRILLIANCE 30

Center pedal 29

Center pedal function 76

Character Code 52

Characters 52

CHORUS 31

combining two voices

→ Dual mode 33

computer 58

Connection

Audio 56

MIDI 61

Other Components 56

Serial 59

Speaker 57

USB 62

Connectors

MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 58, 61

CONTRAST 18

Damper (right) pedal 29

Default (Normal) setting* 30

Demonstration tunes 22

Detailed Settings 64

Metronome 71

MIDI 77

Other settings 81

recording and playback 68

voices 72

Display contrast 18

DOWN (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs 25

metronome 38

Dual

Detailed settings 72

Recording 47

Dual mode

→ combining two voices 33

Effect function 30

EXIT 21

EXTRA TRACKS

→ the third or more tracks 44

FactorySet 85

Fast forward 25, 54

FILE 48

Headphones 18

HOST SELECT switch 57

Jacks

AUX IN 57

AUX OUT 56

AUX PEDAL 57

PEDAL 58

PHONES 18

TO HOST 57, 59

LCD → Display

Contrast 18

LCD → Screen 21

Left pedal 29

Left pedal function 76

LEFT voice group buttons 35

List

Demonstration tunes 22

Detailed Settings 64

Message 86

Preset Voice 93

MAIN voice group buttons 28

Maintenance 13

MASTER VOLUME 18

Memory 48

Memory song 48

MemoryBackUp 85

Message List 86

Metronome 38

Detailed settings 71

METRONOME SETTING 71

MIDI 77

Detailed settings 77

MIDI cables 61

MIDI connectors 58, 61

MIDI driver 59

MIDI SETTING 77

Music stand 16

New Song 39

Normal setting* 30

Other settings 81

100 CLP-970A

Index

Pedal Function

Auxiliary 76

Center 76

Left 76

Right 75

PEDAL jack 58

Pedals 29

Personal computer 58

PHONES jacks 18

Playback

50 Piano Preset Songs 24

Demo Songs 22

Recorded Songs 54

Playing back repeatedly (song) 70

Playing back repeatedly

(specifying the range) 69

playing two voices → Split mode 35

POWER 17

Practicing a one-hand part

(50 preset songs) 26

PRECAUTIONS 3

Preset song memory 48

Preset Voice List 93

Recording

Tape Recorder 56

Recording in Dual 47

Recording in Split 47

Recording Your Performance 39

Re-recording 41

REVERB 31

Rewind 25, 54

Right pedal 29

Right pedal function 75

Scale 82

Screen 21

Select

50 piano preset songs 24

Demo Songs 22

Recorded Songs 53

Selecting a touch response 81

SETTING

metronome 71

Volume 18

Soft (left) pedal 29

Song

Delete 51

Detailed settings 68

Playing back repeatedly 70

Rename 52

Store 48

SONG BALANCE 46

SONG SELECT

50 Piano Preset Songs 24

Recorded Songs 53

Recording 39

SONG SETTING 68

Sostenuto (center) pedal 29

Sound

brilliance 30

expression 30

reverberation 31

spread and spaciousness 31

Soundboard reverb 31

Split

Detailed settings 72

Recording 47

Split mode → playing two voices 35

Split point 36

Splitting the keyboard range and

playing two different voices 35

START/PAUSE

50 Piano Preset Songs 24

Recorded Songs 54

Recording 40

START/STOP

metronome 38

STOP

50 Piano Preset Songs 25

Recorded Songs 54

Recording 40

Storage memory 48

StringResonance 82

SustainSampling 82

Synchro Start

50 preset songs 26

Recorded Songs 54

TEMPO

50 Piano Preset Songs 25

metronome 38

Recorded Songs 54

the third or more tracks

→ EXTRA TRACKS 44

TO HOST jack 57, 59

TouchResponse 81

Track playback on and off 55

TRACK1/TRACK2

50 Piano Preset Songs 26

Recording 39, 43

TRANSPOSE 32

Transposition 32

Troubleshooting 92

Tune 81

Type of characters 52

Type of data (recorded) 89

UP (TEMPO)

50 Piano Preset Songs 25

metronome 38

VOICE SETTING 72

Voices 28

Detailed settings 72

Volume

Balance (SONG BLANCE) 46

Setting 18

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product,

basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions

include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Spe-

cial Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, includ-

ing connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Veriﬁcation: Yamaha products are

manufactured speciﬁcally for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your

dealer for supply voltage veriﬁcation and (if applicable) instruc-

tions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate.

For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the

Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one

blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug

into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem

persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet

replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies

or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power

supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual,

on the name plate, or speciﬁcally recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone

could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connect-

ing cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recom-

mended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire

size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the

AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For

longer extension cords, consult a local electrician.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless speciﬁcally

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations

that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for

enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that

unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not signiﬁcantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain.

Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa,

tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected

from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for

extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected

when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical

storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualiﬁed service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain: or

d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that

described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servic-

ing should be referred to qualiﬁed service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an

ampliﬁer and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of pro-

ducing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO

NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or

at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing

loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory

mounting ﬁxtures that are either supplied as a part of the product

or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be

dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are

stable and any optional ﬁxtures (where applicable) are well

secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-469-2

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

(2 wires)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music

(U.K.) Ltd.

(polarity)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music

Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada

Musique Ltée.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instruc-

tions contained in this manual, meets FCC require-

ments. Modiﬁcations not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to acces-

sories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Fail-

ure to follow instructions could void your FCC authori-

zation to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to com-

ply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations,

Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of

assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/

uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used

according to the instructions found in the users manual,

may cause interference harmful to the operation of

other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regula-

tions does not guarantee that interference will not occur

in all installations. If this product is found to be the

source of interference, which can be determined by

turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate

the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon

lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfac-

tory results, please contact the local retailer authorized

to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate

the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corpo-

ration of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in

accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appa-

ratus may not correspond with the coloured makings iden-

tifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured

BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to

the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured

RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth ter-

minal of the three pin plug.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH

WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-

TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE

LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA

PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these

graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions

indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety

instruction section.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings

The exclamation point within the

equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servic-

ing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead

symbol, within the equilateral trian-

gle, is intended to alert the user to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous

voltage” within the product’s enclo-

sure that may be of sufﬁcient magni-

tude to constitute a risk of electrical

shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so

unless speciﬁcally authorized by Yamaha. Product perfor-

mance and/or safety standards may be diminished.

Claims ﬁled under the expressed warranty may be denied

if the unit is/has been modiﬁed. Implied warranties may

also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the speciﬁcations

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is

approximately ﬁve years. When replacement becomes

necessary, contact a qualiﬁed service representative to

perform the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the man-

ufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners respon-

sibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult

your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

92-469 1

CLP-970A/970AM/970AC

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America,

Keyboard Division

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panama S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Claviers

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,

Home Keyboard Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain

Tel: 91-201-0700

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

F-Musiikki Oy

Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260,

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 09 618511

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: 971-4-881-5868

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3486-0011

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-703-0900

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building,

Singapore

Tel: 65-747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria

3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-3273

[CL] 21

IMPORTANT

Check your power supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage

matches the voltage specified on the name

plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a

voltage selector may be provided on the the bottom

panel of the main keyboard unit near the power

cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set

for the voltage in your area. The voltage

selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially

shipped. To change the setting use a “minus”

screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that

the correct voltage appears next to the pointer

on the panel.

CLP-970A/CLP-970AM/CLP-970AC

Owner’s manual

M.D.G., PA • DMI Division, Yamaha Corporation

V?????? ???AP?????.?-??B0 Printed in Indonesia

Owner’s manual

CLP-970AC

CLP-970AM

CLP-970A

Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only)

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Clavinova Web Site (English only)

http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/

Transcripción de documentos

IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. CLP-970A CLP-970AM CLP-970AC Owner’s manual SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro- duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: 92-469 1 Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indicates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. CLP-970A/970AM/970AC Model Serial No. Purchase Date PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument. • Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. (1) B-6 CLP-970A 3 PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum. Also, be sure to set the volumes of all components at their minimum levels and gradually raise the volume controls while playing the instrument to set the desired listening level. • Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect proper operation of the other products. • Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables. • When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry or slightly damp cloth. Do not use paint thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do not place vinyl, plastic or rubber objects on the instrument, since this might discolor the panel or keyboard. • Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a finger or hand in the key cover gap. • Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly result in the instrument overheating. • Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly process. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might result in damage to the instrument or even injury. • Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. (1) B-6 4 CLP-970A CLP-970A.E.book Page 5 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:41 PM PRECAUTIONS ■ USING THE BENCH (If included) • Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury. • Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the possibility of accident or injury. • If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten them periodically using the included tool. ■ SAVING USER DATA • Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF3 in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use. (1) B-6 CLP-970A 5 CLP-970A.E.book Page 6 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:41 PM Thank you for choosing the Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970A/970AM/970AC. In order to make the most of your Clavinova’s performance potential and features, please read this Owner’s Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference. About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet This manual consists of four main sections: “Introduction,” “Basic Operation,” “Detailed Settings,” and “Appendix.” Also, a separate “Reference Booklet” is provided. Introduction: Please read this section first. In the “Application Index” section on page 11 and “Features” on page 14, you can learn how to use the Clavinova and its functions in particular situations. Basic Operation: This main section explains how to use the basic functions. Refer to this section while you play the Clavinova. If you have questions or come across the words you do not know, refer to the section entitled “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89, or the “Index” on page 99. Detailed Settings: This section explains how to make detailed settings for the Clavinova’s various functions. Refer to this section as necessary. Appendix: This section introduces troubleshooting, a description of preset voices, and other reference material. Reference Booklet: XG Voice List, MIDI Data Format, etc. * The models CLP-970AM and CLP-970AC will be referred to as the CLP-970A in this Owner’s Manual. • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. ■ Trademarks • Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. • IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. • Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ (For the Manual Library, you need to register first. Check the Clavinovas [Digital Piano] web page.) 6 CLP-970A Table of contents Introduction.......................................................... 2 PRECAUTIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 3 About this Owner’s Manual and Reference Booklet..................................................................................................... 6 Table of contents ................................................................................................................................... 7 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. ................................. 11 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................................ 13 Included Accessories ............................................................................................................................ 13 Features ................................................................................................................................................ 14 Before Using the Clavinova.................................................................................................................. 16 Key cover ....................................................................................................................................................................... 16 Music stand ................................................................................................................................................................... 16 Turning the power on................................................................................................................................................... 17 Adjusting the display contrast ...................................................................................................................................... 18 Setting the volume ........................................................................................................................................................ 18 Using headphones......................................................................................................................................................... 18 Basic Operation .................................................. 19 Part Names ........................................................................................................................................... 20 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes................................................................................................ 22 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs ..................................................................................................... 24 Playing the 50 piano preset songs ................................................................................................................................ 24 Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs ....................................................................................................... 26 Selecting and Playing Voices ............................................................................................................... 28 Selecting Voices............................................................................................................................................................. 28 Using the pedals ............................................................................................................................................................ 29 Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS].................................................................. 30 Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE].................................................................................................................................. 32 Combining two voices (Dual mode)............................................................................................................................ 33 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) ............................................................ 35 Using the metronome ................................................................................................................................................... 38 Recording Your Performance............................................................................................................... 39 Recording a New Song.................................................................................................................................................. 39 Recording to [TRACK 1]........................................................................................................................................ 39 Re-recording TRACK 1........................................................................................................................................... 41 Re-recording TRACK 1 partially............................................................................................................................ 42 Recording to [TRACK2]......................................................................................................................................... 43 Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] .................................................................................. 44 Other recording techniques.......................................................................................................................................... 44 Adding data to or recording over an existing song ............................................................................................... 44 Changing a voice or tempo after recording ........................................................................................................... 45 CLP-970A 7 Table of contents Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] ......................... 46 Recording in Dual or Split mode ........................................................................................................................... 47 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] ...................................................................... 48 Clavinova memory.................................................................................................................................................. 48 Basic file operation.................................................................................................................................................. 49 Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory]................................................. 50 Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory... [DeleteSong]................................................................................... 51 Renaming a song...[RenameSong] ............................................................................................................................... 52 Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode]................................................................................... 52 Playing Back Recorded Songs .............................................................................................................. 53 Playing back a song ....................................................................................................................................................... 53 Turning track playback on and off............................................................................................................................... 55 Connections ......................................................................................................................................... 56 Connectors .................................................................................................................................................................... 56 Connecting a personal computer ................................................................................................................................. 58 Detailed Settings ................................................ 63 Detailed Settings.................................................................................................................................. 64 Parameter List ............................................................................................................................................................... 64 Making detailed settings ............................................................................................................................................... 66 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] ........................................................ 68 Correcting note timing [Quantize].............................................................................................................................. 68 Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] ...................................... 69 Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] ................................................................................................................. 69 Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear]....................................................................................................... 69 Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] ......................................................................... 69 Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] ............................................................................................................. 70 Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] ........................................................ 71 Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature]............................................................................................ 71 Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume]...................................................................................... 71 Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] ................................................................................................. 71 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] .............................................................................. 72 Setting the octave [Octave]*......................................................................................................................................... 72 Setting the volume level [Volume]*............................................................................................................................. 72 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* ................................................................................................ 73 Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] ................................................................................................. 73 Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] ....................................................................................................................... 73 Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* ...................................................................................................................... 73 Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type]..................................................................................................................... 74 Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]*..................................................................................................................... 74 Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff]................................................................................................................... 74 Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] .................................................................................................... 74 Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* ................................................................................................... 75 Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]*................................................................................................................ 75 8 CLP-970A Table of contents Setting the right pedal function [RPedal].................................................................................................................... 75 Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] ................................................................................................................ 76 Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] ....................................................................................................................... 76 Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] ......................................................................................................... 76 MIDI [MIDI SETTING]........................................................................................................................... 77 About MIDI................................................................................................................................................................... 77 Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] ............................................................................................. 78 Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 78 Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] ................................................................................. 79 Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl]................................................................................................................ 79 Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect].......................... 79 Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter]................................................................................. 79 Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] ........................................................................ 80 Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump].................................................................................................... 80 Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] ...................................................................................... 80 Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump].................................................................................................. 80 Other settings ...................................................................................................................................... 81 Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] ............................................................................................................. 81 Fine tuning the pitch [Tune]........................................................................................................................................ 81 Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] ............................................................................... 81 Selecting a scale [Scale] ................................................................................................................................................. 82 Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] .................................................................................................. 82 Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth].............................................................. 82 Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] .............................................................. 83 Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] ........................................................................ 83 Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/Pause]...................................................................... 83 Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType].................................................................................................... 83 Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] ....................................... 84 Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange]............................................................................................................................ 84 Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative]..................................................................................... 84 Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] ............................................................................................... 85 Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] ................................................................................................. 85 Other method for restoring the normal settings ......................................................................................................... 85 Message List ......................................................................................................................................... 86 Questions about Operations and Functions ........................................................................................ 89 CLP-970A 9 Table of contents Appendix ............................................................ 91 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................... 92 Preset Voice List ................................................................................................................................... 93 Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) ................................................................................... 95 CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly ........................................................................ 96 Index..................................................................................................................................................... 99 10 CLP-970A Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Listening Listening to demo songs...............................................“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 22 “Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 24 Listening to demo songs with different voices ............“Listening to the Demonstration Tunes” on page 22 Listening to songs from “50 greats for the Clavinova” .......“Playing the 50 piano preset songs” on page 24 Listening to my recorded performance ............................................ “Recording to [TRACK 1]” on page 39 “Playing back a song” on page 53 Playing Using three pedals.............................................................................................“Using the pedals” on page 29 Playing an accompaniment that matches pitch ................... “Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE]” on page 32 Changing tonal color Viewing the list of voices .................................................................................. “Preset Voice List” on page 93 Simulating a concert hall........................................................................................... “[REVERB]” on page 31 Combining two voices ..................................................... “Combining two voices (Dual mode)” on page 33 Playing different sounds with left and right hands ........................... “Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode)” on page 35 Making a voice brighter and sharper, or softer and smoother ........................“[BRILLIANCE]” on page 30 Adding spread to the sound .................................................................................... “[CHORUS]” on page 31 Practicing Muting the right- or left-hand part ........... “Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs” on page 26 Practicing with an accurate and steady tempo.......................................“Using the metronome” on page 38 Practicing using your recorded song .......................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 39 “Turning track playback on and off ” on page 55 Recording Recording your performance ...................................................... “Recording Your Performance” on page 39 Saving recorded songs to memory .....“Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE]” on page 48 CLP-970A 11 Application Index Use this index to find reference pages that may be helpful for your application and situation. Settings Making detailed settings for recording and playback ............................................“Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING]” on page 68 Making detailed settings for the metronome ......................................... “Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING]” on page 71 Making detailed settings for the voices ................................................................. “Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING]” on page 72 Making detailed settings for MIDI .................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 77 Making detailed settings for the Clavinova .........................................................“Other settings” on page 81 Connecting the Clavinova to other devices What is MIDI?..................................................................................... “MIDI [MIDI SETTING]” on page 77 Recording your performance ..................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 56 Raising the volume ..................................................................... “AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 56 Outputting other instruments’ sound from the Clavinova .......... “AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks” on page 57 Connecting a computer........................................................ “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58 Assembling Assembling and disassembling the Clavinova ............................................................. “CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly” on page 96 Quick solution What the Clavinova offers............................................................................. “Application Index” on page 11 “Features” on page 14 Returning to the main screen..............................................................................“[EXIT] button” on page 21 Resetting the Clavinova to the default setting ................................................................“Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet]” on page 85 Meaning of the messages........................................................................................ “Message List” on page 86 If you have questions about operations and functions .............................................................................. “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89 Troubleshooting............................................................................................... “Troubleshooting” on page 92 12 CLP-970A Maintenance Clean the instrument using a dry, soft cloth or slightly damp, soft cloth (wring well). Do not use benzine, thinner, detergent, or chemical cloth for cleaning. Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber products on the instrument. Otherwise, the panel or keys may be discolored or degraded. Before using the Clavinova, be sure to read “Precautions” on pages 3-5. Tuning Unlike an acoustic piano, the Clavinova does not need to be tuned. It always stays perfectly in tune. Transporting If you move to another location, you can transport the Clavinova along with other stuff. You can move the unit as it is (assembled) or you can disassemble the unit down to the condition when you first open the package. Transport the keyboard horizontally. Do not lean it to the wall and the like. Included Accessories “50 greats for the Clavinova” Score Collection Owner’s Manual Bench (included or optional depending on locale) Reference Booklet CLP-970A 13 Features The Yamaha Clavinova CLP-970A digital piano offers unmatched sonic realism and natural grand-piano type playability as well as Yamaha’s original “AWM Dynamic Stereo Sampling” tone generation technology for rich, musical voices, and a special “Graded Hammer” keyboard that provides graded key weight and response throughout the keyboard range. The CLP-970A GrandPiano1 voice features totally new samples painstakingly recorded from a full concert grand piano. The CLP-970A GrandPiano1 voice features five velocity-switched samples (Dynamic Sampling), a “Soundboard Reverb” (page 31) effect that accurately simulates the resonance of a piano soundboard, “String Resonance” (page 82) that recreates resonance of piano strings, special “Sustain Sampling” (page 82)that samples the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings when the damper pedal is pressed, and “Keyoff Samples” that add the subtle sound produced when the keys are released. The CLP-970A comes much closer to the sound of a true acoustic piano. The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop-type personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument. (page 16) DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME C VOICE SETTING LEFT D TEMPO SONG EFFECT VOICE POWER Connect the pedal cord here to use the Clavinova’s pedals. (page 58) PHONES Connect an optional pedal here and assign one of the various functions to the pedal. (page 57) MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R AUX OUT A set of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice. (page 18) R L /L+R AUX IN 14 CLP-970A IN AUX PEDAL TO HOST These jacks allow you to connect an external tone generator to reproduce the sound via the Clavinova’s internal sound system and speakers. (page 57) Connect recording equipment (such as a cassette tape recorder) here to record your performance. (page 56) OUT MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT PEDAL Connect a MIDI device here to use various MIDI functions. (page 58, 61) (About MIDI—page 77) This jack and selector switch allow direct connection to a personal computer for sequencing and other music applications. (page 57-62) Features The display allows accurate control and operation. (page 21) The Clavinova includes 50 preset songs. This section enables you to listen to these songs, practice using a convenient practice function, record and play back your performance. (page 24, 39, 53) MAIN voice gruop buttons Select voices from 25 internal sounds including Grand Piano 1. (page 28) You can also combine two voices at a time. (page 33) [FILE] Save recorded songs and manage song files. (page 48) [METRONOME] Use the metronome functions. (page 38) [DEMO] Demonstration playback is available for each voice. (page 22) DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING [MIDI SETTING] Make detailed MIDI settings, such as MIDI receive/transmit channels. (page 77) METRONOME START/STOP SETTING [CONTRAST] Adjust the brightness of the display using this control. (page 18) B A [REVERB]/ [CHORUS] Add reverb (reverberation) and spread (chorus) to the sound. (page 31) CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME [MASTER VOLUME] Adjust the volume level using this slider. (page 18) SONG TEMPO C [SONG SETTING] Make detailed settings for song recording and playback. (page 68) TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] You can shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down so that the pitch will match that of another instrument or singer, while you play the same keys. (page 32) TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] You can change the song tempo (speed). (page 25, 38, 40, 54) D VOICE EFFECT [EXIT] The screen returns to its main display when you press this button. (page 21) [VOICE SETTING] You can make detailed settings for tone and effects. (page 72) LEFT voice group buttons/ [SPLIT POINT] You can play different voices on the left- and right-hand sections of the keyboard. (page 35) BRILLIANCE [ ][ ] Adjust the brightness of the tone using these buttons. (page 30) [OTHER SETTING] Fine-tune the touch response and pitch, etc. (page 81) CLP-970A 15 Before Using the Clavinova Key cover To open the key cover: Lift the cover slightly, then push and slide it open. To close the key cover: Slide the cover toward you and gently lower the cover over the keys. Be careful to avoid catching your fingers when opening or closing the cover. CAUTION Hold the cover with both hands when opening or closing it. Do not release it until it is fully opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others, especially children’s between the cover and the unit. Do not place objects such as a piece of metal or paper on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover may fall inside the unit when the cover is opened and may be nearly impossible to remove. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to the instrument. Music stand To install the music stand: Hold the upper and bottom sides of the music stand with both hands and insert the peg on the speaker box into the holes on the rear of the stand. • The music stand can be removed to allow placement of a laptop personal computer or other equipment on top of the instrument. To remove the music stand: Lift the music stand slightly, then pull it toward you to remove it. 16 CLP-970A Before Using the Clavinova Turning the power on 1. Connect the power cable. First insert the plug of the power cable into the AC connector on the Clavinova, then plug the other end of the cable into the proper AC outlet on the wall. In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 1 The power connector is located on the bottom of the keyboard, set back deeply. 2 (The shape of plug differs depending on locale.) WARNING! Make sure your CLP-970A is rated for the AC voltage supplied in the area in which it is to be used (voltage rating appears on the name plate on the bottom panel). In some areas, a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. Connecting the unit to the wrong AC supply can cause serious damage to the internal circuitry and may even pose a shock hazard! Use only the AC power cord supplied with the CLP-970A. If the supplied cord is lost or damaged and needs to be replaced, contact your Yamaha dealer. The use of an inappropriate replacement can pose a fire and shock hazard! The type of AC power cord provided with the CLP-970A may be different depending on the country in which it is purchased. (In some areas a plug adaptor may be provided to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.) Do NOT modify the plug provided with the CLP-970A. If the plug will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 2. Turn on the power to the Clavinova. Press the [POWER] switch located on the right of the keyboard to turn the power on. • The screen located in the center of the front panel and the power indicator located below the left end of the keyboard lights up. TIP Power indicator If you close the key cover without turning the power off, the power indicator remains lit, indicating that the power is still on. [POWER] switch Power indicator A B NO C YES D When you turn on the power to the Clavinova, a voice name appears on the screen. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn off the power to the Clavinova. • The screen and the power indicator turn off. CLP-970A 17 Before Using the Clavinova Adjusting the display contrast You can adjust the contrast of the display by turning the [CONTRAST] knob located to the right of the LCD. Use this knob. A CONTRAST B NO YES TERMINOLOGY CONTRAST: difference between brightness and darkness EXIT C D Setting the volume While playing the keyboard, adjust the volume level by moving the [MASTER VOLUME] slider on the left of the front panel to the left or right. MIN MAX Do not use the Clavinova at a high volume level for a long period of time, or your hearing may be damaged. MASTER VOLUME The level decreases. The level increases. TERMINOLOGY MASTER VOLUME: The volume level of the entire keyboard sound TIP You can also adjust the [PHONES] output level and the AUX IN input level using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Using headphones Connect a pair of headphones to one of the [PHONES] jacks. When the headphones are plugged into either of the [PHONES] jacks, the internal speaker system is automatically shut off. Two [PHONES] jacks are provided. Two sets of standard stereo headphones can be plugged in. (If you are using only one pair of headphones, you can plug them into either of these jacks.) PHONES bottom surface standard stereo phone plug 18 CLP-970A TIP Optional headphones HPE-160 Yamaha headphones. Basic Operation 19 CLP-970A CLP-970A 19 Part Names D H F A B CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS L M O REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING VOICE SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING K N STRINGS/ CHOIR MAIN NO YES SPLIT POINT EXIT C LEFT D G E CLP-970 MIN 7 3 5 DEMO SONG SELECT MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE 4 6 VOICE I J EFFECT P B 8 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING DOWN UP SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME 2 DEMO CLP-970 0 SONG 9 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/STOP SETTING A A B TEMPO C CONTRAST PIANO E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN MIN MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE NO DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT VOICE SETTING \ LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE EFFECT POWER 1 A-1 B-1 C0 D0 E0 F0 G0 A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3 F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7 PHONES Center “C” Q R S T Top panel 1 [POWER]..............................................P17 2 [MASTER VOLUME].............................P18 3 [DEMO] ...............................................P22 4 TRANSPOSE [ ] [ ] ..........................P32 5 SONG SELECT [ ] [ ]..........P24, 39, 53 6 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ]....................P46 7 [TRACK1] [TRACK2] / section .................................................P28 I [SPLIT POINT] .....................................P36 J Voice group buttons for the LEFT [EXTRA TRACKS] ............... P28, 41–46, 55 section .................................................P35 8 [FILE] ...................................................P48 9 SONG [STOP] / K [VOICE SETTING] ................................P72 L [REVERB]..............................................P31 M [CHORUS] ............................................P31 N BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] ...........................P30 O [MIDI SETTING]...................................P77 P [OTHER SETTING] ...............................P81 Q [PHONES] ............................................P18 R Soft pedal ............................................P29 S Sostenuto pedal ..................................P29 T Damper pedal .....................................P29 [START/PAUSE] .......................P24, 40, 54 0 [REC]....................................................P40 A [SONG SETTING] ................................P68 B METRONOME [START/STOP] / [SETTING]......................................P38, 71 C TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] .......P25, 38, 40, 54 D LCD buttons A [–] [+] / B [– (NO)] [+ (YES)] / C [–] [+] / D [–] [+]...............................P21 20 E LCD screen ..........................................P21 F [CONTRAST] knob...............................P18 G [EXIT]...................................................P21 H Voice group buttons for the MAIN CLP-970A Part Names Connectors U AUX OUT [R] [L/L+R]..........................P56 V AUX IN [R] [L/L+R] .............................P57 W [AUX PEDAL] ......................................P57 X [TO HOST] ..........................................P57 Y HOST SELECT ..................................... P57 Z MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] .................... P58 [ [PEDAL] .............................................. P58 MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R AUX OUT U R L / L+R OUT IN MIDI PC-2 AUX PEDAL AUX IN W TO HOST HOST SELECT X Y V PEDAL Z [ \ Panel logos GM System Level 1 “GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI standard which guarantees that any data conforming to the standard will play accurately on any GM-compatible tone generator or synthesizer from any manufacturer. You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “GM System Level 1”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A and control it from a connected computer or sequencer. bottom surface XG Format XG is a new Yamaha MIDI specification which significantly expands and improves on the “GM System Level 1” standard with greater voice handling capacity, expressive control, and effect capability while retaining full compatibility with GM. You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP970A and control it from a connected computer or sequencer. D LCD buttons E LCD Use the LCD button A, B, C, or D to select the contents displayed on the LCD. Check the screen located in the center of the top panel after every operation. A voice name appears on the screen when you turn on the power to the unit. A B NO C YES D G[EXIT] button When you press this button, the unit returns to the default screen (the screen that indicates a voice name(s) and is displayed when the power is turned on). CLP-970A 21 Listening to the Demonstration Tunes The Clavinova provides demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate each of the MAIN voice groups. Refer to the table below for voice names and corresponding demo songs. Demonstration tunes Voice group Tunes PIANO E.PIANO/BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/CHOIR Composer Chanson de l’adieu Original Le Coucou Original Organ Concerto Op.4 No.2 Original F.F. Chopin – L.C. Daguin – G.F. Händel – 23 14 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS MAIN voice group buttons STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C 3 VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 4 Procedure 1. Engage the demo mode. Press the [DEMO] button to engage the demo mode. The MAIN voice group (upper row) button indicators light up in sequence. A B NO C 2. YES D Select a tune and start playback. Press the voice group button (upper row) of the desired demonstration tune. The corresponding voice button indicator lights up and playback starts. Until you stop playback, the selected tune will be played repeatedly using different voices (in the following order: PIANO → E. PIANO/BASS → HARPSICHORD → MALLET → ORGAN → STRINGS/CHOIR). 22 CLP-970A TERMINOLOGY Mode: A mode is a status under which you can execute a certain function. In demo mode, you can play back demonstration tunes. NOTE To adjust the volume level of the demo songs, use the [MASTER VOLUME] slider. Listening to the Demonstration Tunes 3. 4. Stop the playback. Press the button of the voice group being played or the [STOP] button. Exit from demo mode. Press the [DEMO] or [EXIT] button to exit from demo mode. CLP-970A 23 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs The Clavinova provides performance data of 50 piano songs. You can just listen to these songs (page 24) or use them for practice (page 26). You can also refer to the included “50 greats for the Clavinova” that contains the scores for 50 piano preset songs. Playing the 50 piano preset songs 1 DEMO CLP-970 METRONOME [START/STOP] SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG 3 2 TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 4 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Select a song. Press one of the [SONG SELECT] buttons repeatedly to select the desired piano song from P-001 to P-050. Song select screen A B NO C TERMINOLOGY Song: On the Clavinova, performance data is called a “Song.” This includes demonstration tunes and piano preset tunes. YES D The song number appears on the display. 2. Play a preset song. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. the number of measures A B NO C YES D TIP • You can also use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song after pressing the [SONG SELECT] button. • [P-000: NewSong] is a blank song provided for you to record your performance. (See page 39.) • Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. (See page 70.) TIP You can play the keyboard along with the preset song playback. You can change the voice playing on the keyboard. 24 CLP-970A CLP-970A.E.book Page 25 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:42 PM Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song select screen. A B NO C 3. YES TIP You can also use the D[–]/[+] buttons to change the tempo. NOTE Resetting the tempo Whenever you select a new preset song, the tempo is automatically reset to the song’s original value. D Stop the song playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. Fast forward and rewind You can perform the following operations in the song select screen: • Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the song while the song is played or stopped. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C [–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. 4. Return to the default screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TERMINOLOGY Default screen: The default screen is a voice select screen (page 28) that appears when you turn on the power to the Clavinova. CLP-970A 25 Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs Practicing a one-hand part using 50 preset songs The 50 preset songs have separate left- and right-hand parts on individual tracks. You can turn the left- and right-hand parts on or off as required so you can practice the corresponding part (the part that is turned off) on the keyboard. The right-hand part is played by [TRACK 1] and the left-hand part is played by [TRACK 2]. 1 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 3 2 procedure 1. Turn off the playback part you wish to practice. After you select a song to practice, press the [TRACK1] or [TRACK2] button to turn off the corresponding part. TIP You can turn parts on or off, even during playback. When you first select a song, both [TRACK1] and [TRACK2] indicators light up, indicating that you can play back both parts. When you press one of the buttons to turn off playback, the corresponding button indicator turns off and the corresponding part playback is muted. Pressing the buttons repeatedly toggles between playback on and off. 2. Start playback and playing. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start playback. Play the part you just turned off. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/ PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. 26 CLP-970A TERMINOLOGY Synchro: Synchronous;occurring at the same time Listening to 50 Piano Preset Songs 3. Stop playback. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP Resetting the part playback Both parts are automatically turned ON whenever you select a new song. You can also assign a phrase in a song to repeatedly practice that part. Refer to the [FromToRepeat] option in the “SONG SETTING” menu on page 69. CLP-970A 27 Selecting and Playing Voices Selecting Voices 1 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST MAIN voice group buttons E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice group. Press one of the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row). TIP To learn characteristics of the voices, listen to demo songs for each voice group (page 22). Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 93 for more information on characteristics of each preset voice. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. TERMINOLOGY Voice On the Clavinova, a voice means “tone” or “tonal color.” Voice group PIANO E.PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD 28 CLP-970A Voice name GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 SynthPiano WoodBass ElectricBass Bass&Cymbal Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' ElectricClavichord Voice group MALLET ORGAN STRINGS/ CHOIR Voice name Vibraphone Marimba Celesta PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 PipeOrganTutti JazzOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat TIP You can control the loudness of a voice by how hard you play the keyboard, although different playing styles (touch sensitivities) have little or no effect with the sound of certain musical instruments. Refer to “Preset Voice List” on page 93. Selecting and Playing Voices Using the pedals The Clavinova has three foot pedals: damper pedal (right), sostenuto pedal (center), and soft pedal (left) that produce a range of expressive effects similar to those produced by the pedals on an acoustic piano. Damper (right) pedal When you press the damper pedal, the notes you play have a longer sustain. When you select Grand Piano 1, pressing the damper pedal activates the instrument’s special “Sustain Samples” to accurately recreate the unique resonance of an acoustic grand piano’s soundboard and strings. h q q. q. . When you press the damper pedal here, the notes you play before you release the pedal have a longer sustain. Sostenuto (center) pedal If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as the pedal is held. All subsequent notes will not sustain. h q q. q. . TIP If the damper pedal doesn’t work, or notes are sustained even when the pedal is not pressed, make sure that the pedal cord is properly plugged into the PEDAL jack on the unit (see step 5 on page 97). Also, make sure that the RPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu is set to ON (see page 75). TIP You can adjust the depth of the resonance produced by the “Sustain Samples” using the Sustain Sampling Depth parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu. (See page 82.) When you press the sostenuto pedal here while holding the note(s), the notes will sustain as long as you hold the pedal. Soft pedal (left) The soft pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played while the pedal is pressed. (The soft pedal will not affect notes that are already playing when it is pressed. Press the pedal immediately before you play the target notes.) With the Vibraphone and Jazz Organ voices, this pedal turns vibrato on and off or toggles the speed of vibrato. (See page 76.) TIP You can assign a function to each pedal via the “R Pedal”, “M Pedal”, and “L Pedal” parameters in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. (See page 75, 76.) TIP The center and left pedals can also be assigned to song start/stop operation (START/PAUSE function) via the “PedalStart/Pause” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu (on page 83). CLP-970A 29 Selecting and Playing Voices Adding variation to the sound [BRILLIANCE]/[REVERB]/[CHORUS] The Effect function enables you to add expression to the sound. The Clavinova effects include Brilliance, Reverb, and Chorus. [REVERB] [CHORUS] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT BRILLIANCE [ ] [ ] [BRILLIANCE] You can use this control to adjust the brilliance of the tone and change the tonality to suit your preference. Procedure Press one of the BRILLIANCE [ ]/ [ ] buttons to select the desired tonality. A B NO C YES D Dark.................... Dark tone Mellow ................ Soft and mellow tone Normal ............... Standard tone Bright ................. Bright tone Metallic............... Sharp metallic tone Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. TIP You can also use the D [–]/ [+] buttons after you press one of the [BRILLIANCE] buttons to select the desired option. TIP Normal setting = Normal TERMINOLOGY Normal setting: The “Normal setting” refers to the default setting (factory setting) obtained when you first turn on the power to the Clavinova. NOTE If you select [Bright] or [Metallic] as the type of brilliance, the volume level will increase slightly. Under this condition, if you raise the [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting, the sound may become distorted. In this case, lower the volume accordingly. 30 CLP-970A Selecting and Playing Voices [REVERB] This control adds reverberation to the sound by simulating the natural reverberation of a concert hall. Procedure Pressing the [REVERB] button repeatedly toggles the reverb on and off. Even if the reverb effect is turned off, a “soundboard reverb” effect will be applied when the GrandPiano1 or GrandPiano2 voice is selected. TIP You can select a reverb type via the Reverb Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the reverb depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. (See page 73.) TIP Normal setting = ON [CHORUS] This control adds spread and spaciousness to the sound. Procedure Pressing the [CHORUS] button repeatedly toggles the chorus on and off. You can turn the chorus effect on and off by pressing the [CHORUS] ON/OFF buttons on the panel and by setting the Chorus On Off parameter in the VOICE SETTING menu (see page 74). The [CHORUS] ON/OFF button setting on the panel is temporary. That is, if you select another voice, the chorus setting for the previous voice is cancelled. The Chorus On Off parameter setting is saved for each voice. That is, if you select a given voice, the chorus setting is automatically turned on or off according to the saved chorus setting. TIP You can select a chorus type via the Chorus Type parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu, and adjust the chorus depth for the selected voice via the Reverb Send parameter. You can also turn chorus on or off via the Chorus On Off parameter. (See page 74.) TIP Normal Setting The normal chorus on/off setting is different for each voice. CLP-970A 31 Selecting and Playing Voices Transposition ... [TRANSPOSE] The Clavinova’s Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals to facilitate playing in difficult key signatures, and to let you easily match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instruments. For example, if you set the transposition amount to “5,” playing key C produces pitch F. In this way, you can play the song as if it were in C major, and the Clavinova will transpose it to the key of F. You can also change the key signature of playback songs, in addition to your own performance. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO 13 C D 2 VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 34 Procedure 1. Display the Transpose screen. Press one of the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons. A B NO C 2. YES TERMINOLOGY Transpose: Changing the key signature of a song. On the Clavinova, transposing shifts the pitch of the entire keyboard. D Select a type of transposition from Manual or Song. Use the C [–] and [+] buttons to select Manual or Song. Manual ............... Your manual performance Song .................... Playback song 3. Set the transposition amount. Use the D [–] and [+] or TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons to set the transposition amount. To set the amount of transposition to “0,” press the D [–] and [+] buttons or the TRANSPOSE [ ] and [ ] buttons simultaneously. 4. 32 CLP-970A Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. TIP The transposition range is from “–12 semitones” (down one octave) through “0” (normal pitch) to “12 semitones” (up one octave). Selecting and Playing Voices Combining two voices (Dual mode) You can play two voices simultaneously across the entire range of the keyboard. In this way, you can simulate a melody duet or combine two similar voices to create a thicker sound. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 95 for examples of effective voice combinations. The numbers on the upper row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from different groups. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING 2 METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING MAIN voice 2 A B 1 3 group buttons PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO The numbers on the bottom row indicate the steps in Dual mode using voices from the same group. C LEFT D 2 VOICE SETTING 3 VOICE 14 EFFECT MAIN voice group buttons Dual mode using voices in different voice groups Procedure 1. Enter Dual mode. Press two MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) simultaneously. A B NO C D 1st voice 2. YES 2nd voice Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons and B [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. The voices listed in the upper row in “Preset Voice List” on page 93 are called 1st voices, and those listed in the bottom row are called 2nd voices. 3. Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any MAIN voice group button. CLP-970A 33 Selecting and Playing Voices Dual mode using voices in the same voice group Procedure 1. 2. 3. Select a voice group. In normal play mode, press the desired MAIN voice group button. Select a voice. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select a voice. Select another voice. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select another voice in the same voice group. To use the identical voices, press the B [–]/[+] buttons once. To use different voices within the same voice group, press the B [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly. A B NO C 4. 34 CLP-970A YES D Exit Dual mode and return to normal play mode. Press any MAIN voice group button. Selecting and Playing Voices Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices (Split mode) Split mode enables you to play two different voices on the keyboard — one with the left hand and another with the right hand. For example, you can play a bass part using the Wood Bass or Electric Bass voice with the left hand, and a melody with the right hand. Refer to “Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split)” on page 95 for examples of effective voice combinations. 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING 2 A B PIANO CONTRAST MAIN voice group buttons E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D 3 VOICE SETTING LEFT 4 VOICE 4 135 EFFECT LEFT voice group buttons Procedure 1. Enter Split mode. Press one of the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row). A B NO C 2. 3. YES D Select a voice for the right hand. Use the MAIN voice group buttons (upper row) and the A [–]/[+] buttons. Select a voice for the left hand. Use the LEFT voice group buttons (bottom row) and the C [–]/[+] buttons. CLP-970A 35 Selecting and Playing Voices Voice group MAIN PIANO LEFT PIANO/E.PIANO E.PIANO/BASS BASS HARPSICHORD HARPSICHORD/MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/STRINGS STRINGS/CHOIR 4. F2 CLP-970A GrandPiano1 GrandPiano2 E.Piano1 E.Piano2 SynthPiano WoodBass ElectricBass Bass&Cymbal Harpsichord8' Harpsichord8'+4' EcelctricClavichord Vibraphone Marimba Celesta PipeOrganPrincipal PipeOrganFlute1 PipeOrganFlute2 PipeOrganTutti JazzOrgan Strings SynthStrings SlowStrings Choir SlowChoir Scat Specify the split point (the border between the rightand left-hand range). I The normal setting of the split point is “F 2.” 36 Voice name Center “C” TIP A specified “split point” key is included in the left-hand range. Selecting and Playing Voices To change the split point setting: Press the [SPLIT POINT] button, then use the D [–]/[+] buttons to specify the split point. (Optional) Press and hold down the [SPLIT POINT] button and play the key you wish to assign as the split point. A B NO C YES D Press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. 5. Exit Split mode and return to normal play mode. Press the voice group button that you pressed for the lefthand range. In Split mode, you can use Dual mode (see page 33) for the MAIN and LEFT ranges respectively. A B NO C YES D CLP-970A 37 Selecting and Playing Voices Using the metronome The Clavinova is built-in metronome (a device that keeps an accurate tempo) is a convenient feature for practice. 12 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Start the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. When the metronome is sounding, the beat indicator flashes at the current tempo. Adjusting the tempo TIP The default tempo is 120. (If a song has been selected, the song tempo is used.) Press the TEMPO [DOWN] or [UP] button. A B NO C YES D To adjust the tempo (number of beats per minute: 10–400), use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] or the D [–]/[+] buttons. To reset the tempo to the normal (default) setting, press the [DOWN] and [UP] keys or the D [–] and [+] keys simultaneously. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the normal screen. 2. 38 CLP-970A Stop the metronome. Press the METRONOME [START/STOP] button. TIP You can set the time signature, metronome volume, and metronome tone using the METRONOME [SETTING] button. (See page 71.) Recording Your Performance TIP You can record your performance (audio data) to a cassette tape recorder or other recording devices via the AUX OUT connector. (see page 56.) This chapter explains how to record your performance using the Clavinova recording function. You can, for example, play back what you have played on the Clavinova keyboard for an effective practice aid. You can also record just the left-hand part, then practice the right-hand part while playing back the recorded left-hand part. Since you can record up to sixteen tracks separately, you could record the leftand right-hand parts separately, or record each part of a four-handed performance or ensemble song one by one to build a song. TERMINOLOGY Recording vs. Saving: The format of performance data recorded on a cassette tape differs from that of data recorded on the Clavinova. A cassette tape records audio signals. On the other hand, the Clavinova “saves” information regarding note timing, voices, and a tempo value, but not audio signals. When you play back recorded songs, the Clavinova produces sound based on the saved information. Therefore, recording on the Clavinova may be more accurately called “saving information.” However, this book often uses the word “recording” because it seems to make more sense. A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 86 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. Recording a New Song Recording to [TRACK 1] 1 3 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT 2 TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 45 3 45 Procedure 1. Select “NewSong” for recording. Press the SONG SELECT [ neously. ][ ] buttons simulta- New Song screen A B NO C NOTE If you select a song other than “P-000: NewSong” and record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. YES D CLP-970A 39 Recording Your Performance 2. 3. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording (see page 28). NOTE Set the tempo in Step 3. Set the other parameters, such as reverb and chorus. Adjust the [MASTER VOLUME] slider to set the volume level to suit your preference. You can also use the slider to adjust the level during playback. After you set the tempo or if the record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the New Song screen. NOTE See page 47 for more information on recording in Dual/ Split mode. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [STOP] button.) Record standby screen A B NO C YES D Set the tempo, if necessary. If this record standby screen does not appear, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once. 4. Start and stop recording. Recording begins automatically as soon as you play a note on the keyboard. (Optional) Press the [START/PAUSE] button to start recording. The recording screen displays the current measure number. Record screen A B NO C YES TIP You can record data while using the metronome. The metronome is not recorded. TIP When you press the [START/PAUSE] button during recording, recording is paused. To resume recording, press the [START/ PAUSE] button again or play a note on the keyboard. D Measure number in recording To stop recording, press the [STOP] button. The Clavinova locates the top of the song. The [TRACK 1] indicator lights up in green. (Record mode is automatically cancelled.) 40 CLP-970A TIP When you press the [REC] button, recording pauses. Recording Your Performance 5. Play back the recorded performance. Press the [START/PAUSE] button to play back the recorded performance. When playback is complete, it automatically stops and the Clavinova locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. NOTE To erase recorded data from a track, use the Channel Clear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu. (See page 69.) When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, the recorded performance data will be lost. If you wish to keep the recording, save the data using the SaveToMemory parameter (page 50) in the File menu. Re-recording TRACK 1 This section explains how to record again in case your performance was not satisfactory. Procedure 1. Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 40 if you wish to change the previous settings. Follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 40 to re-record. The original performance data will be overwritten by new performance data. CLP-970A 41 Recording Your Performance Re-recording TRACK 1 partially This section explains how to record part of a song again. Procedure 1. Pause the song at the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons while the playback screen is displayed to move through the measures or play back the recording and press the [START/PAUSE] button to locate a point slightly prior to the beginning of the part you wish to re-record. Playback screen A B NO C 2. 3. 3-1 YES D Select a voice or voices for recording, if necessary. Repeat Step 2 on page 40 if you wish to change the previous settings. Select the recording method and enter record mode. Press and hold down the [REC] button, and press the C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should start and press the D [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to specify how the recording should end. While you are holding down the [REC] button, the following recording method select screen appears. A B NO C YES D Starting methods: Norm (Normal) — The existing data will be erased after re-recording starts. Key On — Data that exists prior to the point where you start playing a note will not be erased. 42 CLP-970A NOTE If the playback screen is not displayed, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ][ ] buttons once. Recording Your Performance Ending methods: Replace – The data after the point you stop recording will also be erased. Punch Out — The data after the point you stop recording will remain. 3-2 Keep holding down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 1] button. TIP If you cancel recording by pressing the [REC] button, recording stops when you press the button. If you cancel recording by pressing the [STOP] button, the Clavinova locates the top of the song. The [TRACK 1] indicator flashes in red. (To stop recording, press the [REC] button again or press the [STOP] button.) Follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40. Recording to [TRACK2] This section explains how to record another part on the second track. 1 2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT 2 Procedure 1. 2. Select a voice. Select a voice (or voices) for recording. Repeat Step 2 on page 40. Enter record mode and select a recording track. Press and hold down the [REC] button and press the [TRACK 2] button. The [TRACK 2] indicator flashes in red. (To cancel recording, press the [REC] or [STOP] button.) TIP Pressing the [TRACK 1] button repeatedly toggles between playback on (the indicator lights up in green) and off (the indicator turns off). Make the recording by following the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40. You can record a new part while listening to playback of the recorded [TRACK 1] data. CLP-970A 43 Recording Your Performance Recording to the third or more tracks [EXTRA TRACKS] You can continue recording other parts into tracks 3–16 [EXTRA TRACKS] one by one. Procedure 1. Hold down the [REC] button in step 2 in the “Recording to [TRACK2]” on page 43 and use the B [–]/[+] buttons to select a recording track (3–16). select a recording track (3-16) A B NO C 2. YES D While holding down the [REC] key, press the [EXTRA TRACKS] button. Then, follow the procedure beginning with Step 4 on page 40. Other recording techniques Adding data to or recording over an existing song The previous section explains how to record your performance from the beginning by selecting a blank “P000: NewSong.” You can also add your performance to or overwrite existing songs (such as 50 preset songs [P-001—P-050], or your old recorded performances [see page 48]). Procedure 1. Select a song for recording (P-001 – P-050). Select one of the preset songs (P-001–P-050) instead of “P-000: NewSong” as described in Step 1 of “Recording to [TRACK1]” on page 39. To select a song from already-recorded data, see Steps 1 and 2 on page 53. NOTE If you record on a track that already has data, the existing data on the track will be lost. To continue recording, follow the procedure described in “Recording a New Song” from page 39 to 44. 44 CLP-970A Recording Your Performance Changing a voice or tempo after recording You can change the voice and tempo after recording to change a song’s feel or to set a more suitable tempo. You can also change these elements in the middle of a song. Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Select a song you wish to change by using the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons. To change the voice or tempo in the middle of the song, specify the measure to change using the B [–]/ [+] buttons. Change the settings (voice, reverb, etc.). For example, if you wish to change the recorded E.Piano1 voice to E. Piano2, use the MAIN voice group buttons and the A [–]/[+] buttons to select E.Piano2. When the setting is complete, press one of the SONG SELECT [ ] [ ] buttons once to return to the song select screen. Press and hold down the [REC] button and select the track to change. The indicator for the selected track lights up in red. Change the tempo setting now, if necessary. At this point, do not play the keyboard or press the [START/PAUSE] button. Otherwise, recording will start, erasing the recorded data. 5. TIP Refer to “Questions about Operations and Functions” on page 89 for information on the settings that can be changed here. TIP Change the tempo in Step 4. CAUTION The edited settings (except for the tempo setting) will be saved in memory and you will not be able to restore the previous settings. Proceed with caution. Press the [STOP] or [REC] button to exit record mode. CLP-970A 45 Recording Your Performance Adjusting the volume balance between playback and your performance [SONG BALANCE] While recording multiple parts into tracks one by one, you can adjust the volume balance between the playback of the recorded parts and your current performance. Procedure 1. Press one of the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons. A B NO C 2. YES D Adjust the song balance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] or D [–]/[+] buttons. To lower the volume of the playback sound, press the SONG BALANCE [ ] or D [–] button. To lower the volume of the performance sound, press the SONG BALANCE [ ] or D [+] button. Setting range: 127:127 – 1:127 (Lowering the volume of the playback sound) 127:127 – 127:1 (Lowering the volume of the performance sound) Normal setting: 127:127 46 CLP-970A TIP The song balance setting is also used during playback. (See page 53.) Recording Your Performance Recording in Dual or Split mode When you record in Dual or Split mode, the Clavinova records each voice onto a separate track. The following table shows how tracks are assigned to each voice. CAUTION When you record multiple parts into tracks one by one, or when you record new data over an existing song (see page 44), the existing data will be erased. Proceed with caution. In the following example, Tracks 1, 2, and EXTRA TRACKn have been selected for recording. Tracks assigned for recording Tracks used for recording Dual Split Split+Dual TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn TRACK1 TRACK2 EXTRA TRACKn ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ MAIN (1st voice) TRACK1 TRACK2 TRACKn LEFT (1st voice) – MAIN (2nd voice) TRACK3 LEFT (2nd voice) – TRACK4 TRACKn +2 TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK1 TRACKn TRACK2 TRACKn+1 TRACK2 TRACKn +1 – TRACK3 TRACKn +2 – TRACK4 TRACKn +3 Note: TRACKn = TRACK 3 – TRACK 16 If “n+1,” “n+2,” and “n+3” exceed 16, TRACKs 1, 2, and 3 are used. TIP Switching between Dual and Split mode in a song is not recorded. CLP-970A 47 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] File screens (accessed via the [FILE] button) enables you to handle song files (e.g., save, delete, and rename recorded songs), and change the characters on the screen. The following parameters are provided for these operations: Settings Parameter name Reference page Saves recorded and other songs in Clavinova memory SaveToMemory 50 Deletes song data from Clavinova memory DeleteSong 51 Changes the title of songs RenameSongs 52 Change the type of characters on the screen CharacterCode 52 Clavinova memory The Clavinova has the following three types of memory: • Current memory: This is a temporary memory area where you can temporarily place and edit the currently-selected song before playback or recording. • Preset song memory: This read-only memory area saves 50 piano preset songs. • Storage memory: This memory area enables you to save recorded songs. When you select a song in the song select screen, it is loaded from Preset song memory, or Storage memory, into Current memory. You will use Current memory to play back and record songs. When you turn off the power to the Clavinova, songs saved in Preset song memory and Storage memory are not erased. On the other hand, songs in Current memory are lost. If you wish to keep a song in Current memory, you must save it in Storage memory (see page 50, 51). In this manual, a song located in a song recorded in Current memory, is referred to as a “Current song,” and a song in Storage memory is a “Memory song.” Clavinova Preset song memory Storage memory Current memory A 48 CLP-970A TERMINOLOGY File A file contains a group of data. On the Clavinova, a song file includes song data and a song number. Memory Memory is a location inside the Clavinova in which you can save and edit data. Character code Type of characters Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Basic file operation A message (information or confirmation dialog) sometimes appears on the screen to facilitate operation. Refer to the “Message List” on page 86 for an explanation of each message, appropriate actions to take, and troubleshooting information. [FILE] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT Procedure 1. Select a song. 2. Access the File menu. Select a song you wish to save or rename. Press the [FILE] button. A B NO C YES D To close the File menu, press the [EXIT] button once or twice. 3. Select the desired parameter. 4. Set the parameter or execute the command. 5. Close the File menu. Press the [FILE] or A [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly to display the desired item from the following: “SaveToMemory”, “DeleteSong”, “RenameSong”, “CharacterCode”. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], D [–]/[+] buttons. For more information regarding this procedure, refer to the corresponding section below. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-970A 49 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Saving recorded or other songs to Clavinova Storage memory...[SaveToMemory] If you record a song, then turn off the power to the Clavinova, the song will be erased. To save the recorded song, you must save it into the Clavinova Storage memory. You can also save the preset songs and additional or overwriting recordings (page 44) to Storage memory. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 49 the basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Name the song. To move the cursor (a small underline), use the C [–]/[+] buttons. To insert a space, press the C [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. To select a character on the cursor, use the D [–]/[+] buttons. To delete a character, press the D [–]/[+] buttons simultaneously. You can use up to 58 characters for a song name. If the name is longer than the screen, use the C [–]/[+] buttons to move the cursor and scroll the name. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→” “Sure?→.” appears on the screen. Press the B [+ (YES)] button again to confirm the operation. (To cancel the operation, press the B [– (NO)] button.) The Clavinova displays “Executing” on the screen during the operation. When the operation is complete, “Completed” appears. The song is automatically numbered as “Mxx,” where “M” means “Memory” and “xx” is a number. TIP If Storage memory contains one or more songs, and you save a new song, the Clavinova automatically sorts the songs alphabetically and renumbers them. 50 CLP-970A TIP • You can change the type of characters on the screen using the CharacterCode parameter. • When you select a saved song later, the name with an extension “.MID” will appear. TERMINOLOGY “Execute?→”: Do you wish to execute the operation? “Sure?→”: Are you sure? “Executing”: The Clavinova is executing the operation. “Completed”: The operation is complete. CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Deleting songs in Clavinova Storage memory... [DeleteSong] You can delete Memory songs, but not Preset songs or Current songs. A B NO C YES D TIP To delete a Current song, select “ALL” for the ChannelClear parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 69). Alternatively, press the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons simultaneously to display “Song Changed Save?”. This means “A song has been edited. Do you wish to save the change?” Press the B [– (NO)] button. The Current song is deleted and a blank “NewSong” is selected. Procedure See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure of Step 4. 4-1 Select a song to delete. Use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select a song. 4-2 Execute the operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button located next to “Execute?→.” Follow the instructions on screen. TIP If you select a Memory song, deleting the song does not erase song data from Current memory. However, if you return to the song select screen, song information other than the song name is replaced by “--------------”. TIP After you delete a song, the Clavinova automatically updates the song numbers. CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” CLP-970A 51 Saving Recorded Songs and Handling the Files...[FILE] Renaming a song...[RenameSong] You can change a song’s title (except for the preset songs and [P-000: NewSong]. A B NO C YES D Procedure See page 49 for basic operation information. The following is a detailed procedure for Step 4. 4. Name the song as described in the [SaveToMemory] section (page 50). CAUTION Do not turn off the power while the screen displays “Executing.” TIP After you rename a song, the Clavinova sorts songs alphabetically and renumbers them. Changing the type of characters on screen...[CharacterCode] You can change the type of characters that appear on screen. The default setting is “International.” To input katakana, change this setting to “Japanese.” A B NO C Options: International, Japanese Character list [International] [Japanese] 52 CLP-970A YES D Playing Back Recorded Songs You can play back songs recorded using the Record function (page 39). You can also play the keyboard along with the playback. Playing back a song 1 2-2 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 2-1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO D 2-2 43 SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] C VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT 5 TEMPO [DOWN] [UP] Procedure 1. Display the song select screen. Press either the SONG SELECT [ ]/[ ] buttons. Song select screen A B NO C 2. 2-1 YES D Select the desired song. Use the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the song type: “PresetSong,” or “MemorySong.” If the internal Storage memory contains one or more songs, the Clavinova displays “MemorySong.” 2-2 Use the C [–]/[+] or SONG SELECT [ to select a song. TIP You can enjoy ensemble performance by yourself. Record the parts for a fourhanded song or a piano duet, then play the recorded part while playing the other part on the keyboard. ]/[ TIP Use the SongRepeat parameter in the “SONG SETTING” menu (page 70) to select repeat playback of all songs or repeat playback of a single song. ] buttons CLP-970A 53 Playing Back Recorded Songs 3. Start playback. Press the [START/PAUSE] button. Starting playback automatically as you start playing the keyboard (Synchro Start) You can start playback as soon as you start playing the keyboard. This is called the “Synchro Start” function. To enter Synchro Start standby mode, press and hold down the [STOP] button and press the [START/PAUSE] button. The [START/PAUSE] indicator flashes. Now play the keyboard. Playback starts simultaneously. To cancel the Synchro Start function, press the [STOP] button while the Clavinova is in Synchro Start standby mode. You can move back and forth (rewind and fast forward) through the bars by using the B [–]/[+] buttons in the song select screen while the Clavinova is playing or stopped. The bar number in playback A B NO C YES ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Adjusting the tempo You can use the TEMPO [DOWN]/[UP] buttons to adjust the playback tempo as required before or during playback. The default tempo (the song’s original tempo) is set when you press the [DOWN] and [UP] buttons simultaneously. Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. 4. 54 CLP-970A TIP You can play the metronome along with the song playback. When you stop playback, the metronome is also stopped. D You can play the keyboard while the Clavinova is playing back a song. You can also play the notes in a voice different from the playback voice by selecting the voice from the panel, and adjusting the volume balance between the playback parts and your current performance using the SONG BALANCE [ ] [ ] buttons. (See page 46.) Press either of the SONG SELECT [ select screen. TERMINOLOGY Bar: measure ]/[ ] buttons to return to the song Stop playback. When playback is complete, the Clavinova automatically stops and locates the top of the song. To stop playback in the middle of a song, press the [STOP] button. You can also pause playback by pressing the [START/PAUSE] button. Playback stops when you press the button. TIP In the song select screen: • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button while playback is stopped in the middle of the song to locate the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[–] button during playback to restart playback from the top of the song. • Press the SONG SELECT [ ] or the C[+] button during playback to start playback from the next song. Playing Back Recorded Songs 5. Return to the main screen. Press the [EXIT] button. Turning track playback on and off When you select a song on the Clavinova, the indicators for tracks that contain data ([TRACK 1], [TRACK 2], [EXTRA TRACKS]) are lit in green. While the Clavinova is playing or stopped, pressing these track buttons turn off the indicators, and the data on those tracks will not be played. Pressing the track buttons toggles track playback on and off. You can play the part that is turned off. TIP You can practice a part or phrase using the FromToRepeat (page 69) in the “SONG SETTING” menu. CLP-970A 55 Connections Connectors CAUTION Before connecting the Clavinova to other electronic components, turn off the power to all the components. Before turning the power on or off to all components, set all volume levels to minimum (0). Otherwise, electrical shock or damage to the components may occur. MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 R L / L+R R L / L+R AUX OUT 3 TO HOST HOST SELECT PEDAL 4 5 7 2 6 1 AUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] jacks You can connect these jacks to a stereo system to amplify the Clavinova or to a cassette tape recorder to record your performance. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. Adjust the volume level on the stereo system or cassette tape recorder, not using the Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX OUT jacks are connected to an external audio system, first turn on the power to the Clavinova, then to the external audio system. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R IN AUX PEDAL AUX IN 1 OUT MIDI PC-2 cassette tape recorder stereo system L / L+R CAUTION Do not route the output from the AUX OUT jacks to the AUX IN jacks. That is, when you connect an external audio device to the AUX OUT jacks, do not connect the audio device to the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks. If you make this connection, the signal input at the AUX IN jacks is output from the AUX OUT. This creates an audio loop, causing audio oscillation and abnormal playback, leading to malfunction of both pieces of equipment. AUX OUT phone plug (standard) RCA phono →phone adapter plug AUX OUT alternatively RCA phono plug AUX IN TIP Use audio cables and adapter plugs with no resistance. RCA phono plug audio cable 56 CLP-970A TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting does not affect the signal output from the AUX OUT jacks. Connections 2 AUX IN [R], [L/L+R] jacks The stereo outputs from another instrument can be connected to these jacks, allowing the sound of an external instrument to be reproduced via the Clavinova’s speakers. Refer to the diagram below and use audio cables for connection. CAUTION When the Clavinova’s AUX IN jacks are connected to an external device, first turn on the power to the external divice, then to the Clavinova. Reverse this order when you turn the power off. Clavinova R TIP The Clavinova’s [MASTER VOLUME] slider setting affects the input signal from the AUX IN jacks, but the [REVERB], [CHORUS], and [BRILLIANCE] (page 30) settings do not. TIP If you connect the Clavinova to a monaural device, use only the AUX IN [L/L+R] jack or AUX OUT [L/L+R] jack. Plug shape depends on the divece. L / L+R AUX IN AUX OUT (OUTPUT) AUX IN phone plug (standard) Tone Generator audio cable 3 AUX PEDAL jack Connect an optional foot controller FC7 or foot switch FC4 or FC5 here. Using the FC7 enables you to add expression to your performance by controlling the volume level of the notes you play. Using the FC4 or FC5 enables you to turn the assigned function on and off. Use the AuxPedal parameter in the “VOICE SETTING” menu. You can also assign the [START/PAUSE] button function to this foot switch. (See page 83.) 4 TO HOST jack This jack allows direct connection to a personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58 for more information.) 5 HOST SELECT switch This switch should be set according to the type of connected MIDI device or personal computer. (Refer to “Connecting a personal computer” on page 58 for more information.) CLP-970A 57 CLP-970A.E.book Page 58 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:42 PM Connections 6 MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] connectors Use MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices to these connectors. Make sure you set the HOST SELECT switch (described on the privious page) to MIDI when you use these connectors. 7 PEDAL jack Connect the pedal cord from the pedal box. (Refer to “Keyboard Stand Assembly” on pages 96-98.) Connecting a personal computer You can enjoy computer music data on the Clavinova by connecting a computer to the TO HOST (or MIDI) jack. You can also play music data that conforms to the “GM System Level 1” and “XG” standards from the computer’s sequence software. “The Clavinova-Computer Connection” is a supplementary guidebook that describes, for beginners, what you can do with your Clavinova and a personal computer and how to set up a Clavinova-Computer system (the manual is not written for any specific models). The document is available as a PDF file (in English) at the following Internet address: Clavinova Web site: http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ Yamaha Manual Library (Electronic Musical Instruments): http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ (For the Manual Library, you need to register first. Check the Clavinovas [Digital Piano] web page.) There are the three methods by which to connect the Clavinova to a personal computer: 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack (page 59) 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors (page 61) 3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface (page 62) For more information, refer to the following pages. TIP When connecting the Clavinova to a personal computer, first turn off the power to both the Clavinova and the computer before connecting any cables and setting the HOST SELECT switch. After making connections and switch settings, turn on the power to the computer first, then to the Clavinova. TIP If you do not use the TO HOST jack of the Clavinova, make sure you disconnect the cable from the jack. If the cable is left connected, the Clavinova may not function properly. TIP When the HOST SELECT switch is set to “PC-1,” PC-2,” or “Mac,” you can use the TO HOST jack, but the MIDI connectors are disabled since no data transfer occurs via the MIDI connectors. On the other hand, when the HOST SELECT switch is set to “MIDI,” you can use the MIDI connectors, but not the TO HOST jack since no data is transferred via the TO HOST jack. 58 CLP-970A Connections 1. Connecting the serial port on the computer to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack Connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. In this connection, the Clavinova functions as a MIDI interface. Therefore, you do not need a special MIDI interface. Connection Use a special serial cable (page 60) to connect the computer’s serial port (RS-232C or RS-422) to the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack. Clavinova Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT TO HOST RS-232C (D-sub 9-pin) RS-232C (D-sub 25-pin) modem port Windows Windows Macintosh Note for Windows 95/98 users (regarding MIDI driver) To transfer data via the computer’s serial port and the Clavinova’s TO HOST jack, you need to install a specified MIDI driver (Yamaha CBX driver for Windows 95/98). You can download this driver from the following XG Library on the Yamaha Web site: http://www.yamaha-xg.com CLP-970A 59 Connections Type of serial cables and connection pin assignments According to the type of computer you connect, use one of the following serial cables. • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 9-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 9-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC2 or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 8 (CTS) 7 (RTS) 2 (RxD) 5 (GND) 3 4 8 5 D-sub 9-pin • Macintosh System peripheral plug → 8-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-MAC or equivalent) mini DIN 1 2 8-pin 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 (TxD) • Windows (with a serial port of D-sub 25-pin) 8-pin mini DIN plug → D-sub 25-pin plug (Yamaha CCJ-PC1NF or equivalent) 2 (HSK i) mini DIN 1 (HSK O) 8-pin 5 (RxD-) 4 (GND) 3 (TxD-) 8 (RxD+) 7 (GP-) 6 (TxD+) • Pin assignment The following diagram shows the pin assignments for each cable. Pin numbers (view from front) mini DIN 8-pin 1 2 3 4 8 5 5 (CTS) 4 (RTS) 3 (RxD) 7 (GND) D-sub 25-pin mini DIN 8-pin D-sub 25-pin D-sub 9-pin 6 7 8 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 5 4 3 2 1 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 9 8 7 6 2 (TxD) Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch properly according to the type of connected computer. • Macintosh: “Mac” (data transfer rate: 31,250bps, 1MHz clock) • Windows: “PC-2” (data transfer rate: 38,400bps) TIP If your system does not work properly with the connections and settings listed above, your software may require different settings. Check your software operation manual and set the HOST SELECT switch to the proper data transfer rate. (Data transfer rate of “PC-1” is 31,250bps.) 60 CLP-970A Connections 2. Using a MIDI interface and the Clavinova’s MIDI connectors Connection Use a MIDI interface device to connect a computer to the Clavinova using special MIDI cables. Clavinova MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 OUT IN MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI interface MIDI interface Windows Macintosh Clavinova HOST SELECT switch setting Set the Clavinova HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.” CLP-970A 61 Connections 3. Using the USB port on the computer and the UX256, a USB interface Connect the USB port of the computer to the UX256 using a USB cable, install the driver (that came with the UX256) on the computer, and connect the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or MIDI cables. For more information, refer to the instruction manual for the UX256. UX256: Yamaha USB-MIDI Interface. Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using a serial cable or PC-1 TO HOST USB cable Mac HOST SELECT Standard Machintosh 8-pin system peripheral cable computer Clavinova UX256 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE B A METRONOME START/STOP SETTING − MIN ＋ − CONTRAST PIANO ＋ NO DOWN SPLIT POINT − ＋ E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN YES UP − ＋ EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME D C TEMPO SONG EFFECT VOICE POWER Connecting the UX256 to the Clavinova using MIDI cables MIDI THRU OUT IN MIDI USB cable HOST SELECT MIDI cables computer Clavinova UX256 DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING MAX TRANSPOSE NEW SONG SONG BALANCE B A METRONOME START/STOP SETTING − MIN ＋ − CONTRAST ＋ NO DOWN PIANO SPLIT POINT − ＋ E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET MALLET ORGAN ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN YES UP − ＋ EXIT VOICE SETTING LEFT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO C D VOICE EFFECT POWER 62 CLP-970A Detailed Settings CLP-970A 63 Detailed Settings You can set various parameters to make the best use of Clavinova functions, such as fine tuning the pitch, selecting a voice for the metronome, repeating playback, etc. See page 66 for the normal (default) setting for each parameter. Parameter List The following parameters are available. Recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Settings Correcting note timing Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing Auditioning the channels Deleting data by each channel Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly Playing back a song repeatedly Parameter name Reference page Quantize 68 QuickPlay 69 ChannelListen ChannelClear FromToRepeat SongRepeat 69 69 69 70 Metronome METRONOME [SETTING] Settings Metronome time signature Metronome volume level Metronome voice Parameter name TimeSignature MetronomeVolume MetronomeSound Reference page 71 71 71 Voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Settings Octave* Volume level* Position of right and left channels* Fine pitch adjustment (only in Dual mode) Reverb type Reverb depth* Chorus type Chorus depth* Chorus on/off Variation effect type Variation effect depth* Touch sensitivity* 64 CLP-970A Parameter name Octave Volume Pan Detune ReverbType ReverbSend ChorusType ChorusSend ChorusOnOff VariationType VariationSend TouchSense Reference page 72 72 73 73 73 73 74 74 74 74 75 75 Detailed Settings Right pedal function Center pedal function Left pedal function Auxiliary pedal function RPedal MPedal LPedal AuxPedal 75 76 76 76 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Settings MIDI transmit channel MIDI receive channel (Port A) MIDI receive channel (Port B) Local control on/off Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission Type of data received via MIDI Type of data transmitted via MIDI Song data bulk dump Transmitting the initial settings Voice data bulk dump Parameter name Reference page MidiOutChannel MidiInAChannel MidiInBChannel LocalControl 78 78 79 79 MidiOutSelect 79 ReceiveParameter TransmitParameter SongBulkDump InitialSetup VoiceBulkDump 79 80 80 80 80 [OTHER SETTING] Settings Selecting a touch response Fine tuning of the pitch Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice Selecting a scale Depth of string resonance Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound Pitch bend range Replacing the preset voices with XG voices Selecting the items saved at the time of shutdown Restoring the normal (default) settings Parameter name Reference page TouchResponse Tune PianoTuningCurve Scale StringResonanceDepth SustainSamplingDepth VivraphoneRotorSpeed VibraphonePedalMode PedalStart/Pause AuxPedalType 81 81 81 82 82 82 83 83 83 83 HalfPedalPoint 84 PitchBendRange XGAlternative MemoryBackUp FactorySet 84 84 85 85 CLP-970A 65 Detailed Settings Making detailed settings METRONOME [SETTING] A [–] [+] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING B [– (NO) ] [+ (YES) ] A B PIANO CONTRAST [MIDI SETTING] E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG TEMPO [SONG SETTING] C C [–] [+] VOICE SETTING LEFT D D [–] [+] VOICE EFFECT [VOICE SETTING] [OTHER SETTING] Procedure 1. Access a setting menu. Press the desired setting button ([SONG SETTING], METRONOME [SETTING], [VOICE SETTING], [MIDI SETTING], or [OTHER SETTING]) to access the corresponding setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button any time to close the setting menu. 2. 3. Select the desired parameter or part. Press the setting button, A [–]/[+], and/or C [–]/[+] buttons repeatedly as required. Set the parameter or part. Some parameters or parts lead you to more options. Use the B [– (NO)]/[+ (YES)], C [–]/[+], and D [–]/[+] buttons to select or set the option. To restore the normal parameter value, press the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously. 66 CLP-970A Detailed Settings 4. Write, execute, or save the data. There are two ways to respond to the messages. If “Execute?→” or “Start?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to display confirmation ([Sure?→]). To proceed, press the B [+(YES)] button again. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and writes the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. To cancel the operation, press the B [–(NO)] button instead of the B [+(YES)] button. A B NO C YES D If “Set?→” appears: Press the B [+(YES)] button to execute the setting. The Clavinova displays “Executing” and saves the data. When the operation is complete, it displays “Completed” for three seconds, then returns to the previous screen. A B NO C 5. YES D Close the setting menu. Press the [EXIT] button. CLP-970A 67 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] You can make detailed settings for the selected song. First, select the desired song from preset songs (“PresetSong”), or memory songs (“MemorySong”) (see page 53). Procedure Select the desired song and press the [SONG SETTING] button to access the “Song Setting” menu. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN TRANSPOSE MAX SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO VOICE SETTING LEFT D VOICE EFFECT [SONG SETTING] Correcting note timing [Quantize] You can correct the timing of notes. For example, you can adjust recorded notes to precise eighth or sixteenth notes, or make the entire feel of a song more lively (with a swing type of rhythm). • Changes are made by song. • You can also listen to the sound while changing the setting. To change the data, you need to respond to “Execute?→.” See the procedure on page 66. Stores the changed value. A If you select “1/8” for correction: Performance data Swing rate = 50% : not swinging Swing rate = 75% (51% or higher) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly delayed. Swing rate = 25% (49% or lower) : The timing of even beat notes is slightly early. B NO C YES D Specifies the type of note. Swing rate = 67% : The timing of the even beat notes is moved to the third beat of the triplets. 3 Notes for which you can adjust the timing: [OFF] [1/4] quarter note [1/8] eighth note [1/16] sixteenth note 3 [1/12] eighth note triplets 3 [1/24] sixteenth note triplets If you select “1/8” or “1/16” for correction, the Clavinova displays “SwingRate=xx%”, which enables you to make the entire feel of a song more lively and swinging. Setting range: 0% - 100% 68 CLP-970A TIP Save the edited song data to memory. (See page 48.) 3 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Specifying whether playback starts immediately along with the first voicing [QuickPlay] This parameter enables you to specify whether a song that starts from the middle of a bar, or a song with a silence prior to the first note, should be played from the first note or from the top of the bar (rest or blank). See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C You can delete data from each of 16 channels. See the procedure on page 66. Press this button to delete data. A B NO C YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for deletion. YES Setting range: D Ch1 - Ch16, ALL (all channels) Setting range: [On] Playing from the first note [Off] Playing from the top of the bar (including a rest or blank) Auditioning the channels [ChannelListen] You can select a single channel to listen to its contents. Playback starts from the first note. See the procedure on page 66. Playback continues as long as you press and hold down this button. A B NO C Deleting data from each channel [ChannelClear] YES D Use these buttons to select the desired channel for playback. TIP • Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. • Save the edited song data to memory. (See page 48.) Specifying the range and playing back repeatedly [FromToRepeat] You can specify a range (in steps of beats) in a song to play back repeatedly. • Playback repeats after it reaches just prior to the beat specified as the end point. • If you start playing back a song with “Repeat On” selected, the count down starts, followed by the repeated playback of the specified part until you press the [STOP] button. • If you select “Repeat Off,” normal playback starts. See the procedure on page 66. Use these buttons to select “Repeat On.” A Setting range: B NO YES Ch1 - Ch16 TIP Channels that do not contain any data are not displayed. C Use these buttons to specify the start point of the repeated range. D Use these buttons to specify the end point of the repeated range. NOTE When you select another song, the specified range is automatically cancelled and the Repeat function is turned off. CLP-970A 69 Detailed settings for recording and playback [SONG SETTING] Playing back a song repeatedly [SongRepeat] You can repeatedly play back all songs or a single song selected from the 50 preset songs or from memory songs. • When you start playback, the Clavinova plays the song you selected using the front panel, then starts repeat playback of the specified songs until you press the [STOP] button. See the procedure on page 66. Use these buttons to select “On.” A B NO C YES D Use these buttons to specify the repeated songs. Setting range: [MemorySongs] All songs in the Clavinova’s memory [PresetSongs] All 50 preset songs [ALL] All songs from “MemorySongs,” and “PresetSongs” [OneSong] One song selected from the front panel 70 CLP-970A Detailed settings for the metronome METRONOME [SETTING] You can set the time signature, volume level, and voice of the Clavinova metronome. Procedure Press the [METRONOME SETTING] button to access the Metronome Setting menu. METRONOME [SETTING] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO Setting the metronome time signature [TimeSignature] LEFT VOICE EFFECT Selecting the metronome voice [MetronomeSound] See the procedure on page 66. See the procedure on page 66. A A B NO C Use these buttons to set the numerator of the time signature. D VOICE SETTING B NO YES C D Use these buttons to set the denominator of the time signature. For example, to specify “3/4,” use the C [–]/[+] buttons to select “3” and the D [–]/[+] buttons to select “4.” Setting range for the numerator: 1 - 16 Setting options for the denominator: 2, 4, and 8 YES D Setting range: [BellOff] [EnglishVoice] [GermanVoice] [JapaneseVoice] [FrenchVoice] [SpanishVoice] [BellOn] Click (standard metronome sound) Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in English Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in German Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Japanese Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in French Click and “1, 2, 3, 4” in Spanish Click and bell TIP To mute the beat count, select “BellOff.” Setting the metronome volume level [MetronomeVolume] See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 0-127 CLP-970A 71 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] This menu enables you to make various detailed settings for the voices in Dual or Split mode and the effects. You can make these settings for each voice (or each combination of voices) individually. You can listen to the notes you play on the keyboard while changing the settings. Procedure 1. Select a voice and press the [VOICE SETTING] button to access the “Voice Setting” menu. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT [VOICE SETTING] 2. Press the A [–]/[+] buttons to select the part for which you wish to change the voice. The range of the displayed part varies depending on the selected voice. [Main] MAIN voices (displayed with a single voice or in Split mode) [Main × Layer] MAIN Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the MAIN side is in Dual mode) [Left] LEFT voice (displayed in Split mode) [Left × Layer] LEFT Voice 1 and Voice 2 (displayed when the LEFT side is in Dual mode) TIP In Dual mode, parameters with the “*” mark are set for Voice 1 and Voice 2 individually. Setting the octave [Octave]* You can shift the pitch up and down in octave steps. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO YES Setting the volume level [Volume]* You can set the volume level for each voice part. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C C In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: –2 (two octaves lower - 0 (no pitch shift) - +2 (two octaves higher) 72 CLP-970A YES D D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting range: In Dual mode: A B NO C YES –20 - +20 (With positive values, the pitch of Voice 1 is raised and the pitch of Voice 2 is lowered. With negative values, the pitch of Voice 1 is lowered and the pitch of Voice 2 is raised.) D Voice for editing (Voice 1 and Voice 2) Selecting the reverb type [ReverbType] Setting range: 0 - 127 Setting the position of right and left channels [Pan]* You can specify the position in the stereo image from which you hear the sound. See the procedure on page 66. A TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “LeftXLayer.” See the procedure on page 66. A B NO YES B NO YES C D Setting range: C D In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Room Simulates reverberation in a room. Hall Simulates reverberation in a concert hall. Hall2 Reverberation is slightly longer than that of “Hall1.” Stage Reverberation suitable for a solo instrument sound. Plate Reverberation from the vibration of a metal plate. Setting range: L64 (hard left) - C (center) - R63 (hard right) Setting the reverb depth [ReverbSend]* Fine tuning the pitch (only in Dual mode) [Detune] TIP The reverb effect is not applied if the ReverbSend parameter is set to “0.” You can slightly shift the pitch of two voices selected for Dual mode. See the procedure on page 66. A See the procedure on page 66. A B B NO NO C C YES YES D D CLP-970A 73 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] In Dual mode: In Dual mode: A B NO C A B YES D NO C Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: Setting range: 0 - 127 0 - 127 Selecting the chorus type [Chorus Type] TIP You cannot set this parameter for the voice parts “Left” and “Left × Layer.” Setting the chorus on/off [ChorusOnOff] You can set the [CHORUS] button on or off for each voice. When you select a voice, the chorus on/off setting for the voice automatically changes according to this parameter. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES See the procedure on page 66. D A Setting range: Chorus Celeste Flanger TIP Even if this parameter is turned on, the chorus effect is disabled if the ChorusSend parameter is set to 0. Adds a rich, spacious sound. Adds swell and a spacious sound. Adds swell effects of an ascending or descending jet plane. B NO C YES D Setting range: On/Off Setting the chorus depth [ChorusSend]* Selecting the variation effect type [VariationType] See the procedure on page 66. A B NO YES You can select other effects (than reverb and chorus). See the procedure on page 66. A C B D NO C 74 CLP-970A YES D Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting range: DelayLCR Delay applied at left, center, and right positions. DelayLR Delay applied at left and right positions. Echo Echo-like delay CrossDelay Left and right delays are crossed. Symphonic Adds a rich and deep acoustic effect. RotarySpeaker Adds the vibrato effect of a rotary speaker. Tremolo The volume level changes in rapid cycles. VibeRotor The vibrato effect of a vibraphone. AutoPan The sound pans left to right and back and forth. Phaser The phase changes periodically, swelling the sound. AutoWah The center frequency of the wah filter changes periodically. SoundBoardRev Simulates the reverberation of a piano soundboard. Off No effect. Setting the touch sensitivity [TouchSense]* This parameter enables determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard (how hard you play). Since the volume level of the harpsichords and pipe organs do not change regardless of how you play the keyboard, the normal setting for these voices is 127. (See the setting range below.) See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES D In Dual mode: A B NO C YES D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting the variation effect depth [VariationSend]* See the procedure on page 66. A Setting range: 0 (softest) - 64 (largest changes in the level) - 127 (loudest and fixed) B NO C YES Setting the right pedal function [RPedal] D See the procedure on page 66. In Dual mode: A A B B NO NO C C D D Voice for editing (Voice 1 or Voice 2) Setting range: 0 - 127 YES YES Setting range: SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer as you press the pedal deeper. Sustain On/Off switch type damper function. PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously. Off No function. Normal setting: SustainCount CLP-970A 75 Detailed settings for the voices [VOICE SETTING] Setting the center pedal function [MPedal] See the procedure on page 66. A You can assign a function to the pedal connected to the Clavinova’s AUX PEDAL jack. See the procedure on page 66. B NO Setting the auxiliary pedal function [AuxPedal] YES A C NO D Setting range: Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 29.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal Setting: Sostenuto Setting the left pedal function [LPedal] See the procedure on page 66. A B NO B YES C YES D Setting range: Expression Sustain Makes the sound softer or louder. On/Off switch type damper function. (See page 29.) SustainCont Damper function that sustains the sound longer as you press the pedal deeper. (See page 29.) PitchBend Changes the pitch continuously. Sostenuto Sostenuto pedal function. (See page 29.) Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 29.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal setting: C D Setting range: Soft Soft pedal function. (See page 29.) RotarySpeed Changes the number of rotations of the rotary speaker effect in the JazzOrgan voice. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between fast and slow rotation speeds.) VibeRotor Turns the vibrato of the Vibraphone voice on and off. (Pressing the pedal repeatedly toggles between on and off.) Off No function. Normal Setting: Soft (for all voices other than JazzOrgan and VibraPhone) Rotary Speed (JazzOrgan), Vibraphone (VibeRotor) 76 CLP-970A Expression TIP Optional pedals • Yamaha FC7 foot controller This foot controller is suitable for controlling Expression, SustainCont, and PitchBend. • Yamaha FC4 foot controller Yamaha FC5 foot controller These foot switches are suitable for controlling Sustain, Sostenuto, Soft, RotarySpeed, and VibeRotor. MIDI [MIDI SETTING] You can make detailed MIDI settings, such as setting up MIDI transmit/receive channels. About MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a standard format for data transmission/reception. It enables the transfer of performance data and commands between MIDI devices and personal computers. Using MIDI, you can control a connected MIDI device from the Clavinova, or control the Clavinova from a connected MIDI device or computer. You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “GM System Level 1” or “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A, and control it from a connected computer or sequencer. TIP MIDI performance data and commands are transferred in the form of numeric values. MIDI connectors MIDI THRU Mac PC-1 OUT IN MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT MIDI [IN]: Receives MIDI data. MIDI [OUT]: Transmits MIDI data. MIDI [THRU]: Transmits data received at the MIDI [IN] connector as it is. TIP Prepare dedicated MIDI cables. Since MIDI data that can be transmitted or received varies depending on the type of MIDI device, check the “MIDI Implementation Chart” to find out what MIDI data and commands your devices can transmit or receive. The Clavinova’s MIDI Implementation Chart is listed on pages 29 and 30 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970A. When you are using the MIDI connectors, set the [HOST SELECT] switch to “MIDI.” (See page 58.) [TO HOST] connector Use this connector to connect the Clavinova to a computer. Mac PC-1 TO HOST MIDI PC-2 HOST SELECT TIP The type connecting cable varies depending on the computer. Refer to “Connecting a Personal Computer” on page 58 for more information. TIP When you are using the [TO HOST] connector, set the [HOST SELECT] switch correctly, according to the type of computer you are using. (See page 58.) You can also obtain detailed information about MIDI from various music magazines and books. CLP-970A 77 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Procedure Press the [MIDI SETTING] button to enter MIDI setting mode. [MIDI SETTING] DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO Setting the MIDI transmit channel [MidiOutChannel] This parameter enables you to specify the channel on which the Clavinova transmits MIDI data. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C Select a voice part. VOICE See the procedure on page 66. A B YES D Specify the channel. NO C Select a channel. Setting for: Ch1 - Ch16 Setting range: Setting range: Ch1 - Ch16, Off (Not transmitted.) On/Off Normal setting: Normal setting: Main — Ch1 Left — Ch2 Layer — Ch3 Left Layer— Ch4 On for all channels Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port A) [MidiInAChannel] This parameter enables you to specify for each channel whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN] connector or the [TO HOST] port A (CBX driver’s port A). YES D Main, Left, Layer, Left Layer CLP-970A EFFECT TIP The received data is played back using the XG voices (page 6 in the “Reference Booklet” for the CLP-970A). You can also assign the Clavinova’s preset voices to part of the data. (See “XG Alternative” on page 84.) Setting for: 78 VOICE SETTING LEFT D Select On or Off. MIDI data MIDI IN TO HOST Port A Port B Sound source A Channels 1-16 Sound source B Channels 1-16 Used for song playback Used for performance and playback MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Setting the MIDI receive channel (Port B) [MidiInAChannel] This parameter enables you to specify for each channel whether the Clavinova receives data at the MIDI [IN] connector or the [TO HOST] port B (CBX driver’s port B). TIP The received data is played back using the preset voices (page 93). See the procedure on page 66. A Setting range: On/Off Normal setting: On Selecting performance from the keyboard or song data for MIDI transmission [MidiOutSelect] You can select whether your performance data or song playback data (including demo songs) is sent via MIDI. See the procedure on page 66. B A NO B YES NO C D C Select a channel. YES D Select On or Off. Setting range: Setting for: Ch1 - Ch16 Keyboard (performance data played on the keyboard) Song (song playback data) Setting range: Normal setting: On/Off Keyboard Normal setting: On for all channels Selecting a type of data received via MIDI [ReceiveParameter] Setting Local control on/off [LocalControl] “Local Control On” is a state in which the Clavinova produces the sound from its tone generator when you play the keyboard. In “Local Control Off ” state, the keyboard and the tone generator are cut off from each other. This means that even if you play the keyboard, the Clavinova will not produce the sound. Instead, the keyboard data can be transmitted via MIDI to a connected MIDI device, which can produce the sound. The “Local Control Off ” setting is useful when you wish to play an external sound source while playing the keys on the Clavinova. See the procedure on page 66. A C A B NO C Select a type of data. YES D Select On or Off. Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: On/Off B NO This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can receive. See the procedure on page 66. YES Normal setting: On for all types of data D CLP-970A 79 MIDI [MIDI SETTING] Selecting a type of data transmitted via MIDI [TransmitParameter] This parameter enables you to specify which MIDI data the Clavinova can transmit. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES Transmitting the initial settings on the panel [InitialSetup] You can transmit the panel data, such as voice selection, to a connected sequencer. Before you record performance data to a connected MDF3 or sequencer, it is useful if you first send and record (at the beginning of the performance data) the panel setup data for your performance during playback. See the procedure on page 66. D A Select a type of data. Select On or Off. B NO YES Type of data: Note, Control, Program, Pitch Bend, SystemRealTime, SysEx (System Exclusive) Setting range: Normal setting: On for all types of data You can transmit the voice data specified in the “Voice Setting” menu (page 72) as MIDI bulk data. You can interrupt voice data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 66. Executing song data bulk dump [SongBulkDump] You can save current song data on the Clavinova as MIDI bulk data by transferring it to a connected MIDI data filer (such as an MDF3) or a sequencer. To play back the saved song data, send the bulk data back from the storage device to the Clavinova and follow the usual playback procedure. You can interrupt song data bulk dump transmission by pressing the B [– (NO)] button. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO 80 CLP-970A D Executing voice data bulk dump [VoiceBulkDump] On/Off C C YES D A B NO C YES D Other settings You can make detailed settings for touch, tuning, scale, etc. Procedure Press the [OTHER SETTING] button to enter Other Setting mode. DEMO CLP-970 SONG SELECT TRACK 1 TRACK 2 EXTRA TRACKS FILE METRONOME START/ STOP SETTING A B PIANO CONTRAST E. PIANO/ BASS HARPSICHORD MALLET ORGAN PIANO/ E. PIANO HARPSI/ MALLET ORGAN/ STRINGS BASS STRINGS/ CHOIR REVERB CHORUS MIDI SETTING BRILLIANCE OTHER SETTING MAIN NO NEW SONG MIN MAX TRANSPOSE SONG BALANCE STOP START/ PAUSE REC SONG SETTING DOWN YES SPLIT POINT UP EXIT SYNCHRO START MASTER VOLUME SONG C TEMPO D VOICE SETTING LEFT VOICE EFFECT [OTHER SETTING] Selecting a touch response [TouchResponse] Fine tuning the pitch [Tune] You can fine tune the pitch of the entire instrument. This function is useful when you play the Clavinova along with other instruments or CD music. See the procedure on page 66. You can specify a touch response (how the sound responds to the way you play the keys). See the procedure on page 66. A A B B NO NO C C D D Setting range: Light YES YES With a soft touch, the Clavinova produces a loud sound. The volume level of tones tends to be consistent. Medium Standard touch response. Heavy You must hit the key very hard to generate a loud volume. This allows for versatile expression, from pianissimo to fortissimo tones. Fixed No touch response. The volume level will be the same regardless of how hard you play the keys. Use the B [–]/[+] buttons to set the volume level. Setting range: A3=427.0Hz - 453.0Hz (0.1Hz steps) Selecting a tuning curve for a piano voice [PianoTuningCurve] You can select a tuning curve from “GrandPiano1” and “GrandPiano2.” Select “Flat” if you feel the tuning curve of the piano voice does not quite match that of other instruments voices. See the procedure on page 66. A B Setting range of the “Fixed” volume level: NO 1 - 127 C YES D Setting range: Stretch Flat Tuning curve particularly for pianos Tuning curve in which the frequency is octave doubled over the entire keyboard range CLP-970A 81 Other settings If you select a scale other than Equal, you need to specify the root note using the B [–]/[+] buttons. Selecting a scale [Scale] You can select various scales. Equal Temperament is the most common contemporary piano tuning scale. However, history has known numerous other scales, many of which serve as the basis for certain genres of music. You can experience the tunings of these genres. See the procedure on page 66. A YES Equal One octave is divided into twelve equal intervals. Currently most popular piano tuning scale. PureMajor/PureMinor Based on natural overtones, three major chords using these scales produce a beautiful, pure sound. They are sometimes used for chorus parts. Pythagorean This scale, designed by Pythagoras, a Greek philosopher, is composed of only five pitches. The 3rd produces swells, but the 4th and 5th are beautiful and suitable for some leads. MeanTone This scale is an improvement of the Pythagorean in that the swell of the 3rd has been eliminated. It spread during the late 16th century through the late 18th century. Handel used this scale. WerckMeister/KirnBerger These scales combine Mean Tone and Pythagorean in different ways. With these scales, modulation changes the impression and feel of the songs. They were often used in the era of Bach and Beethoven. They are also often used now to reproduce the music of that era on harpsichords. Equal 82 CLP-970A NO C YES D I b I b b C, C , D, E , E, F, F , G, A , A, B , B Setting range: Depth of string resonance [StringResonanceDepth] D Setting range: Normal setting: B B NO C A This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.” See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES D Setting range: 1 - 10, Off Depth of sustain sampling for the damper pedal [SustainSamplingDepth] This parameter is effective only on “GrandPiano1.” See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C Setting range: 1 - 10, Off YES D Other settings Setting the speed of vibraphone’s vibrato effect [VibraphoneRotorSpeed] This parameter enables you to set the speed of vibrato when you select the Vibraphone voice and use a vibe rotor pedal. See the procedure on page 66. A TIP If you assign the START/PAUSE function to a pedal and turn the function On, the pedal function assigned to the pedal in the Voice Setting menu (pages 75 and 76) is disabled. See the procedure on page 66. B NO Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal [PedalStart/ Pause] YES A B NO C C Setting range: 1 - 10, Off Select a pedal to assign the function. Set to On or Off. Left, Middle, AUX Setting range: On/Off This parameter enables you to select whether the sound is sustained while you press the keys on the keyboard (“PianoLike”) or the sound is sustained only while you press and hold down the sustain pedal, like playing a real vibraphone (“Normal”). See the procedure on page 66. A D Setting for: Selecting a pedal function for vibraphone [VibraphonePedalMode] B NO C YES D YES D Normal setting: Off for all pedals Selecting a type of auxiliary pedal [AuxPedalType] A pedal connected to the [AUX PEDAL] connector may switch on and off differently. For example, some pedals turn on the effects and others turn them off when you press them. Use this parameter to reverse this mechanism. See the procedure on page 66. Setting range: PianoLike, Normal A B NO Normal setting: YES PianoLike C D Setting range: Make, Break CLP-970A 83 Other settings Setting the point at which the damper pedal starts to affect the sound [HalfPedalPoint] You can specify how far down you should press on the right pedal until the damper effect (page 29) starts working. This setting is effective when the right pedal function (page 75) is set to either SustainCont or Sustain. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO C YES D Replacing the XG voices with preset voices [XGAlternative] You can connect your computer or sequencer to the MIDI IN or TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A to play “GM System Level 1” or “XG”-conformed music data on the CLP-970A, and control it from a connected computer or sequencer. The CLP-970A provides the XG tone generator for the purpose of playing GM or XG music data. You can replace some XG voices with the preset voices on the panel for playback. This parameter enables you to select “Native” (using the preset voices) or “XG” (using the XG voices). See the procedure on page 66. A Setting range: B NO –2 (effective with the shallowest press) - 0 - +2 (effective with the deepest press) C Pitch bend range [PitchBendRange] B NO YES D Setting range: –12 (Pitch is lowered by 12 semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.) - +12 (Pitch is raised by 12 semitones [one octave] when you press the pedal.) –2 84 CLP-970A Select on or off. Setting for: A Normal setting: D Select the desired item. This parameter enables you to set the range of continuous pitch change made by the Pitch Bend function. • This parameter is effective only on the keyboard performance sound. • You can set the range in semitone steps. See the procedure on page 66. C YES All preset voices on the panel Setting range: Native Using the preset voices XG Using the XG voices Normal setting: GrandPiano1 Other voices Native XG (using the preset voices) (using the XG voices) Other settings Selecting items saved at shutdown [MemoryBackUp] Restoring the normal (default) settings [FactorySet] You can back up some settings, such as voice selection and metronome setting, so that they will not be lost after you turn off the power to the Clavinova. • Memory songs (saved in the Clavinova’s memory), the backup on/off setting (this parameter setting), and the “CharacterCode” parameter setting (page 52) are always backed up. See the procedure on page 66. A B NO You can reset the Clavinova to its normal (factory default) settings. • The CharacterCode parameter setting in the File menu does not change. • The MemoryBackUp parameter setting (On/Off) (left column) is reset to the normal setting. • You can specify whether the memory songs are erased or kept. See the procedure on page 66. Reset the Clavinova. YES A C Select the desired item. B NO D YES Select on or off. Setting for: Transpose, Brilliance, ReverbOnOff, SplitPoint, Main/ LeftVoice, MetronomeSetting, SongSetting, SongBalance, MidiSetting, and OtherSetting Setting range: C D Select a value for memory songs. Selecting for “MemorySong”: MemorySongExcluded MemorySongIncluded Memory songs are kept. Memory songs are erased. On/Off Normal setting: The Transpose, Main/LeftVoice, and MetronomeSetting parameters are set to Off. Other parameters are set to On. Other method for restoring the normal settings Press and hold down the white key on the right end (C7) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. In this case, the Memory songs saved in the storage memory are not erased. If you wish to erase Memory songs at this time, press and hold down the right-most white key (C7) and black key (Bb6) and press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power to the Clavinova. B 6 C7 [POWER] CLP-970A 85 Message List The messages are listed in alphabetical order. Message Meaning This message is displayed following the message “BulkDataReceiving Song/ Voice.” Receiving bulk data is complete. After this message appears, you can proceed to the next step. Receiving bulk data has failed. Check the parameter settings and try again. The Clavinova is receiving the song bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The Clavinova is receiving the voice setting bulk data while this message is displayed. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. You have cancelled the “SongBulkDump” (page 80) or “VoiceBulkDump” (page 80) transmission by pressing the B [–(NO)] button. This message is displayed following the message “Executing.” The Clavinova’s internal processing is complete. You may proceed to the next step. You tried to save a song by changing its title (using the “RenameSong” (page 52), or “SaveToMemory” (page 50), but a song with the same name already exists in memory. Three seconds after this message appears, the previous screen is restored. Rename the song. This message prompts you to execute a file-related operation. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to proceed, or press the [EXIT] button to cancel. The Clavinova is processing the data internally. Wait until the message disappears, then proceed to the next step. The normal (factory default) settings (except for the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 85) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 key and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 85). 86 CLP-970A Message List Message Meaning The normal (factory default) settings (including the memory song setting) (“FactorySet” on page 85) have been restored. This message also appears if you press and hold down the C7 and Bb6 keys and turn on the power to the Clavinova (page 85). The Clavinova’s flash memory (storage memory) has expired. Consult your Yamaha dealer. If this message appears, the Clavinova will not back up the songs and settings in memory. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous screen. You turned off the power to the Clavinova while it was writing a song to storage memory. This message appears next time you turn on the power. The Clavinova checks if the contents of storage memory can be recovered. This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova recovered data in the storage memory as much as possible. This message appears following the message “LastPowerOffIllegalMemorySongChecking,” indicating that the Clavinova could not recover data in the storage memory and that all memory songs were deleted. There is not enough memory space left and you cannot save any more songs. Delete some songs in the storage memory (page 51), then save new data to memory. You tried to delete a song that does not exist in the storage memory. You cannot delete the song. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to overwrite the existing data with new data when you add recordings to a song. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to allow overwriting. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. You tried to start playing a song or perform another operation right after you select the song. Wait until the message disappears. This message prompts you to select whether you wish to save the edited settings. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to save the settings. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel. CLP-970A 87 Message List Message Meaning You tried to perform another operation before saving the recorded song to storage memory. If you continue the operation, the recorded song will be lost. To delete the new recording, press the B [– (NO)] button. To keep the recording, press the B [+ (YES)] button. The Clavinova displays the “SaveToMemory” (page 50) parameter screen. Save the recorded song, then proceed to another operation. The Clavinova has found some defects in the selected (or playing) song. Select the song and play it again. If you still see this message, the song data may be damaged. The Current memory space is full during recording. Recording stops automatically. The data recorded up to that point remains. This message also appears when you try to enter recording mode to make an additional recording but the song data already fills the Current memory. In this case, you cannot make an additional recording. Use the “ChannelClear” parameter (page 69) to delete unnecessary tracks (if any) to make more room in memory. This message prompts you to start the operation. To start, press the B [+ (YES)] button. Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the operation. This message prompts you to confirm the execution. Press the B [+ (YES)] button to continue. Press the B [– (NO)] button to cancel. There is a malfunction with the TO HOST connector. When you are using the CLP-970A with a connected computer: The power to the computer is turned off, the cables are connected incorrectly, the [HOST SELECT] switch is set incorrectly, or the driver or MIDI application on the computer works incorrectly. Turn off the power to the CLP-970A and the computer, then check the cable connections and the [HOST SELECT] switch setting. Then, turn on the power to the computer and the CLP-970A in this order and check to see if the driver and MIDI application on the computer work properly. When you are using only the CLP-970A: This message appears if a cable is connected to the TO HOST connector on the CLP-970A. In this case, turn off the power to the CLP-970A, remove the cable from the TO HOST connector, then turn on the power to the CLP970A. If the cable is left connected to the TO HOST connector, the CLP970A may not work correctly. You used a period or space at the beginning of a song name or you tried to change a song name that includes a character (or characters) not supported by the CLP-970A, and the CLP-970A could not process the name. The Clavinova displays the previous screen in three seconds. Rename the song correctly. 88 CLP-970A Questions about Operations and Functions ■ The buttons do not respond. While you are using a function, some buttons not used for the function are disabled. If the song is playing, stop the playback. Otherwise, press the [EXIT] button to return to the main screen. Then, perform the desired operation. ■ The sound sustains and does not decay when I press the sostenuto pedal. With the voices in the ORGAN or STRINGS/ CHOIR group, the sound continues sustaining while you are holding down the sostenuto pedal. ■ Higher or lower notes does not sound correctly when the transpose or octave setting is made. The setting range for the transposition and octave setting is C2 - G8. (With the normal setting, the Clavinova’s 88 keys covers the range of A1 - C7.) If the lowest key is set to a note lower than C2, it will produce a sound one octave higher. If the highest key is set to a note higher than G8, it will produce a sound one octave lower. ■ How can I return to the recording or song select screen during song recording or playback? Press one of the SONG SELECT [ tons once. ] or [ ] but- ■ The tempo does not change even though I recorded with tempo changes. Depending on the timing of tempo changes, the changed tempo may not be recorded. In this case, the recording will be played back at the original tempo. Make tempo changes when the recording track is selected and a red track indicator is flashing. The same trick applies to editing the tempo after recording. ■ Performance in Dual or Split mode is not recorded. Track data is lost unexpectedly. For Dual or Split mode recording, the recording track for the second voice (that is, the voice for the left-hand part) is automatically assigned (page 46). Therefore, if the track already has data, the data will be overwritten during recording. Also, switching to Dual mode or Split mode in the middle of the song is not recorded. Therefore, the notes you played with the second voice (or the notes lower than the Split point) are not recorded. ■ What type of data is recorded? Data recorded in the tracks: • Note data (notes you play) • Voice selection • Clavinova pedals and external pedals on/off • Reverb depth “ReverbSend” • Chorus depth “ChorusSend” • Variation effect depth “VariationSend” • Voice octave setting “Octave” • Voice volume level “Volume” • Stereo image of each voice “Pan” • Fine tuning of two voice pitch (Dual mode) “Detune” • Volume level changes for each voice with response to the way you play “TouchSense” Data recorded globally in all tracks: • Tempo • Time signature • Reverb type • Chorus type • Variation effect type You can change all data except for note data after recording. You can change the time signature at the beginning of the song, or at a position in the song to which you move, by using the B [–]/[+] buttons while the song is stopped. CLP-970A 89 Questions about Operations and Functions ■ I cannot change the key signature in the song after recording. Press the [STOP] button to locate the top of the song, use the B [–]/[+] buttons to locate the measure in which you wish to change the key signature, then change it. ■ How much data can I record? • Current memory (page 48): About 600KB • Storage memory (page 48): About 750KB ■ The on/off setting of the pedal connected to the AUX PEDAL jack is reversed. Some types of pedals may turn on and off in opposite fashion. Use the “AuxPedalType” parameter (page 83) in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to change the external pedal setting. 90 CLP-970A ■ The song title is not correct. The “CharacterCode” setting may be different than that used when you named the song. Also, if the song was recorded on another instrument, the title might be displayed incorrectly. Use the “CharacterCode” parameter (page 52) in the FILE menu to change the setting. ■ What is the difference between “TouchSense” and “TouchResponse” MIDI data? “TouchSense” determines the manner and degree to which the volume level changes in response to your touch on the keyboard. It causes MIDI exclusive data (that controls the tone generator) to be output. “TouchResponse” determines the touch sensitivity as an instrument and causes MIDI note-on velocity data to be output. Appendix CLP-970A 91 Troubleshooting Problem The Clavinova does not turn on. A click or pop is heard when the power is turned on or off. Noise is heard from the Clavinova’s speakers. The overall volume is low, or no sound is heard. Cause The Clavinova has not been plugged in properly. Electrical current is being applied to the instrument. The noise may be due to interference caused by the use of a mobile phone in close proximity to the Clavinova. The [MASTER VOLUME] is set too low. Headphones are connected. The Local Control function is turned off. The damper pedal has no effect, or the sound continuously sustains even when the damper pedal is not pressed. The pitch and/or tone of the piano voices in certain ranges do not sound right. Mechanical noise is heard during performance. 92 CLP-970A The pedal cord plug is not connected. The Clavinova’s piano voices attempt to precisely simulate actual piano sounds. However, as a result of sampling algorithms, overtones in some ranges may sound exaggerated, producing a somewhat different pitch or tone. The Clavinova’s keyboard mechanism simulates the keyboard mechanism of a piano. Mechanical noise is also heard on a piano. Solution Securely insert the female plug into the socket on the Clavinova, and the male plug into a proper AC outlet. (See page 17.) This is normal, and is no cause for concern. Turn off the mobile phone, or use it further away from the Clavinova. Raise the [MASTER VOLUME] level. (See page 18.) Unplug the headphones. (See page 18.) Turn the Local Control function on. (See page 79.) Securely insert the pedal cord plug into the proper jack. (See step 5 on page 97.) This is normal. This is normal. Preset Voice List Voice name Stereo sampling Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description GrandPiano1 ● ● ● ● ● This voice has been sampled from a full concert grand piano. It features five-stage dynamic sampling, tone changes with damper pedal operation, and a subtle voicing at the release of the keys. It simulates the ultimate acoustic piano sound. It also reproduces a string resonance that is typical of acoustic pianos. This voice is suitable not only for classical music but for piano music of any genre. GrandPiano2 ● ● × × × A bright, expansive piano sound which is ideal for rock and popular genres. E.Piano1 ● ● ● × × An electronic piano sound created by FM synthesis. Extremely “musical” response with varying timbre according to keyboard dynamics. E.Piano2 × ● ● ● × The sound of an electric piano using hammerstruck metallic “tines.” Soft tone when played lightly, and an aggressive tone when played hard. SynthPiano × ● × × × This voice simulates the electric piano sound produced by synthesizers in popular music. It also goes well with the acoustic piano sound. WoodBass ● ● ● ● × This voice simulates the sound of an upright bass played with the fingers, and is suitable for jazz and Latin music. Stereo sampling has improved the acoustic feel. ElectricBass × ● ● × × Electric bass for a wide range of music styles, jazz, rock, popular, and more. Bass&Cymbal ● ● ● × × WoodBass sound and stereo-sampled cymbal sound are layered. This voice is very effective for a jazz walking bass. Harpsichord8' ● × × ● × The harpsichord is often used for Baroque music. The volume level is always consistent regardless of how you play. The instrument generates a peculiar voice when you release the keys. “8’” means that it produces the same octave sound as the keys. Harpsichord8'+4' ● × × ● × This voice combines the 8’ and 4’ harpsichord sounds. “4’” means that it produces a sound one octave higher than the actual keys. × This is the voice of a keyboard that produces sound by striking the strings with magnetic pickups. This funky sound is popular in black contemporary music. Because of its unique structure, the instrument produces a peculiar sound when you release the keys. × This voice simulates a vibraphone played with a soft mallet. The harder you play, the more metallic it sounds. Use the “VibraphonePedalMode” parameter in the “OTHER SETTING” menu to select whether the sound sustains while you hold down the keys, or the sound sustains only when you press the pedal. An actual vibraphone has a rotor inside the resonance tube, which rotates via the motor to create the vibrato effect. Pressing the left pedal applies this effect; pressing the pedal again turns the effect off. ElectricClavichord Vibraphone × ● ● ● × ● ● × CLP-970A 93 Preset Voice List Voice name Marimba Touch Sense Dynamic sampling Key-off samples String resonance Voice description ● ● ● × × This voice simulates a concert-type marimba sound. Stereo sampling helps reproduce a real acoustic spread. Celesta ● ● ● × × A celesta is a percussive instrument. When you play the keyboard, the hammer hits a metallic board to produce the sound. This instrument is famous for the impressive sound in “Dance of the Suger-Plum Fairy” of The Nutcracker Suite by Tchaikovsky. PipeOrganPrincipal ● × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+2') of a principal (brass instrument) organ. It is suitable for Baroque church music. × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4') of a flute (woodwind instrument) organ. Its soft sound is suitable for the accompaniment of hymns. PipeOrganFlute1 94 Stereo sampling ● × × × PipeOrganFlute2 ● × × × × This voice features the combination of pipes (8'+4'+1 1/3') of a flute organ. It sounds more brilliant than PipeOrganFlute1 and is suitable for solo performance. PipeOrganTutti ● × × × × This voice features a full coupler of a pipe organ, famous for the sound used in Toccatta and Fugue by Bach. JazzOrgan × × × × × The sound of a “tonewheel” type electric organ. Often heard in jazz and rock idioms. Strings ● ● × × × This voice features a string ensemble that accurately simulates all string instruments, including contrabass, cello, viola, and violin. SynthStrings ● ● × × × Sampled strings, processed for spread and warmth. This voice is suitable for a pad in ensemble music. SlowStrings ● ● × × × This voice features a string ensemble sound with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or electric piano. Choir ● ● × × × A big, spacious choir voice. Perfect for creating rich harmonies in slow pieces. SlowChoir ● ● × × × This voice features a chorus sound with a slow attack. It is suitable for a duet with piano or electric piano. Scat ● ● ● × × You can enjoy jazz “scatting” with this voice. Depending on how hard and what note range you play, different sounds will be produced. CLP-970A Voice Combination Examples (Dual and Split) Dual MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano1 + E.Piano1 GrandPiano1 + E.Piano2 GrandPiano1 + SynthPiano MAIN + MAIN GrandPiano2 + GrandPiano2 MAIN + MAIN E.Piano1 + SlowChoir MAIN + MAIN E.Piano2 + ElectricClavichord MAIN + MAIN Harpsichord8' + Strings MAIN + MAIN Celesta + SynthStirngs MAIN + MAIN This combination is often used in popular music. This produces a fantasy, spacious piano sound. This combination sounds as if you are playing two notes that are two octaves apart. It is suitable for the accompaniment of Salsa music. This is suitable for romantic ballads. This is suitable for funk, rhythm & blues, and soul music. This combination is very suitable for Baroque music. This combination adds strings and bell sound. A delay effect is automatically applied. Split MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 / WoodBass or Bass&Cymbal MAIN / LEFT Celesta / Choir MAIN / LEFT Choir / GrandPiano1 MAIN / LEFT Scat / WoodBass MAIN / LEFT E.Piano2 / Scat This is recommended for light Jazz music. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This is suitable for a peaceful, somewhat cute song. Play these voices elegantly along with piano arpeggio. Playing the Choir voice in chords would be more effective. This combination features a cool (stylish) jazz chorus. The Scat voice is touch sensitive, adding a variety of expressions. Playing the Scat voice for a bass part may create an interesting sound. Dual + Split MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano1 + SynthString / GrandPiano1 MAIN + MAIN / LEFT GrandPiano2 + E.Piano1 / ElectricBass MAIN + MAIN / LEFT + LEFT Harpsichord8' + 4' + Strings / Harpsichord8' + Strings This combination creates the thick sound of a layered piano and strings. This sound is suitable for fusion. Deeper reverb and chorus (pages 73 and 74) will improve the groove. The damper pedal is effective on the voice assigned to the right-hand range. This combination makes a very brilliant sound. CLP-970A 95 CLP-970A.E.book Page 96 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:42 PM CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly CAUTION • Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the sequence given below. • Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons. • Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated below. Use of incorrect screws can cause damage. • Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each unit. • To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below. Have a Phillips-head (+) screwdriver ready. 1. Attach the side panels to the pedal box. Place the plastic bag that contained the side panels on the floor when assembling the stand to prevent scratches to the floor or stand. Make sure the indented surface on the side panel and the rear surface on the pedal box will match correctly, without creating a step. The parts shown in the “Assembly Parts” illustration will be used. Follow the assembly instructions and select the parts as needed. side panel (right) Assembly Parts 6 x 16 mm 2 flat-head screws x4 4 4 x 20 mm tapping screws x4 Cord holders x 2 3 4 x 12 mm round-head screws x2 (2) Use the four long round-head screws 1 to attach the pedal box. First attach one side panel, then attach the other side panel. 2. side panel (left) (1) Untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. Don’t discard the vinyl tie, you’ll need it later in step 6. Attach the rear panel. (2) Secure the top of the rear panel to the side panel brackets using two thin round-head screws 3. side panel (left) rear panel side panel (right) pedal box Bundled pedal cord inside 96 CLP-970A AC power cord (1) With the rear panel on the feet’s protruding edge, align the panel with the groove and secure the top of the panel. R main unit (3) Secure the bottom of the rear panel to the pedal box using four tapping screws 4. L 1 6 x 25 mm round-head screws x4 CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly 3. Mount the main unit. CAUTION • Fingers can become pinched between the main unit and the rear or side panels, be extra careful so as not to drop the main unit. • Do not hold the keyboard in any position other than the position shown in the above illustration. Be sure to place your hands at least 10 centimeters from either end of the main unit when positioning it. 5. Connect the pedal cord. (1) Pass the pedal cord plug from the rear as shown, and insert the plug into the PEDAL jack. 6. Secure the pedal cord. (2) Use a vinyl tie to take up any slack in the pedal cord. at least 10 cm Fix the main unit. (1) Center the main unit to produce equal clearance on the left and right sides. 7. Set the voltage selector and connect the power cord. Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting of the voltage selector which is provided in some 127 areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected, connect the AC power cord to the AC INLET and an AC wall outlet. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area. 110 (2) Use short flat-head screws 2 to secure the main unit from the front. * Use the rear hole on the front brackets to attach the screws. 220 240 4. (1) Attach the cord holders to the rear panel as shown, then clip the cord into the holders. CAUTION • An improper voltage setting can cause serious damage to the Clavinova or result in improper operation. CLP-970A 97 CLP-970A.E.book Page 98 Monday, December 11, 2000 5:43 PM CLP-970A/970AM/970AC: Keyboard Stand Assembly 8. Set the adjuster. When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the bottom of the main unit. Do not hold the keyboard cover or speaker box. Improper handling can result in damage to the instrument or personal injury. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. Key cover Speaker box After completing the assembly, please check the following. • Are there any parts left over? • Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors. • Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures? • Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location. • Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it? • Tighten all screws. • Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the pedals? • Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor. • Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets? • Check the connection. • If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all screws. 98 CLP-970A Index You can search the desired section using not only the terminology in this manual but also commonly-used words. The * mark indicates that the corresponding page includes the terminology explanation in the right column. Numerics D L 50 greats for the Clavinova 13 50 Piano Preset Songs 24 Practicing a one-hand part 26 Damper (right) pedal 29 Default (Normal) setting* 30 Demonstration tunes 22 Detailed Settings 64 Metronome 71 MIDI 77 Other settings 81 recording and playback 68 voices 72 Display contrast 18 DOWN (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 25 metronome 38 Dual Detailed settings 72 Recording 47 Dual mode → combining two voices 33 LCD → Display Contrast 18 LCD → Screen 21 Left pedal 29 Left pedal function 76 LEFT voice group buttons 35 List Demonstration tunes 22 Detailed Settings 64 Message 86 Preset Voice 93 A Adding reverberation to the sound → REVERB 31 Adding variation to the sound → Effect function 30 Assembly 96 Assigning the START/PAUSE function to a pedal 83 AUX IN jacks 57 AUX OUT jacks 56 AUX PEDAL jacks 57 Auxiliary pedal function 76 B BackUp 85 Bench 13 BRILLIANCE 30 C Center pedal 29 Center pedal function 76 Character Code 52 Characters 52 CHORUS 31 combining two voices → Dual mode 33 computer 58 Connection Audio 56 MIDI 61 Other Components 56 Serial 59 Speaker 57 USB 62 Connectors MIDI IN/OUT/THRU 58, 61 CONTRAST 18 E Effect function 30 EXIT 21 EXTRA TRACKS → the third or more tracks 44 F FactorySet 85 Fast forward 25, 54 FILE 48 H M MAIN voice group buttons 28 Maintenance 13 MASTER VOLUME 18 Memory 48 Memory song 48 MemoryBackUp 85 Message List 86 Metronome 38 Detailed settings 71 METRONOME SETTING 71 MIDI 77 Detailed settings 77 MIDI cables 61 MIDI connectors 58, 61 MIDI driver 59 MIDI SETTING 77 Music stand 16 Headphones 18 HOST SELECT switch 57 N J New Song 39 Normal setting* 30 Jacks AUX IN 57 AUX OUT 56 AUX PEDAL 57 PEDAL 58 PHONES 18 TO HOST 57, 59 O Other settings 81 CLP-970A 99 Index P Pedal Function Auxiliary 76 Center 76 Left 76 Right 75 PEDAL jack 58 Pedals 29 Personal computer 58 PHONES jacks 18 Playback 50 Piano Preset Songs 24 Demo Songs 22 Recorded Songs 54 Playing back repeatedly (song) 70 Playing back repeatedly (specifying the range) 69 playing two voices → Split mode 35 POWER 17 Practicing a one-hand part (50 preset songs) 26 PRECAUTIONS 3 Preset song memory 48 Preset Voice List 93 R Recording Tape Recorder 56 Recording in Dual 47 Recording in Split 47 Recording Your Performance 39 Re-recording 41 REVERB 31 Rewind 25, 54 Right pedal 29 Right pedal function 75 S Scale 82 Screen 21 Select 50 piano preset songs 24 Demo Songs 22 Recorded Songs 53 Selecting a touch response 81 100 CLP-970A SETTING metronome 71 Volume 18 Soft (left) pedal 29 Song Delete 51 Detailed settings 68 Playing back repeatedly 70 Rename 52 Store 48 SONG BALANCE 46 SONG SELECT 50 Piano Preset Songs 24 Recorded Songs 53 Recording 39 SONG SETTING 68 Sostenuto (center) pedal 29 Sound brilliance 30 expression 30 reverberation 31 spread and spaciousness 31 Soundboard reverb 31 Split Detailed settings 72 Recording 47 Split mode → playing two voices 35 Split point 36 Splitting the keyboard range and playing two different voices 35 START/PAUSE 50 Piano Preset Songs 24 Recorded Songs 54 Recording 40 START/STOP metronome 38 STOP 50 Piano Preset Songs 25 Recorded Songs 54 Recording 40 Storage memory 48 StringResonance 82 SustainSampling 82 Synchro Start 50 preset songs 26 Recorded Songs 54 T TEMPO 50 Piano Preset Songs 25 metronome 38 Recorded Songs 54 the third or more tracks → EXTRA TRACKS 44 TO HOST jack 57, 59 TouchResponse 81 Track playback on and off 55 TRACK1/TRACK2 50 Piano Preset Songs 26 Recording 39, 43 TRANSPOSE 32 Transposition 32 Troubleshooting 92 Tune 81 Type of characters 52 Type of data (recorded) 89 U UP (TEMPO) 50 Piano Preset Songs 25 metronome 38 V VOICE SETTING 72 Voices 28 Detailed settings 72 Volume Balance (SONG BLANCE) 46 Setting 18 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST. WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic product, basic precautions should always be followed. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE making any connections, including connection to the main supply. 2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual. 3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug. 4. Some electronic products utilize external power supplies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. 5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25’ cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. 6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in locations that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instructions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required. 7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided. 8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp locations and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Examples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement. 9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. 10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for extended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightning and/or electrical storm activity. 11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist. 12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when: a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain: or d. The product dose not operate, exhibits a marked change in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the product has been damaged. 13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. 14. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. 15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-469-2 FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/ uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. (2 wires) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT. ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND. (polarity) • This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. • Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée. (class B) SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graphics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indicated on this page and those indicated in the safety instruction section. rechargable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings The exclamation point within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within the equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electrical shock. Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you. Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your dealer before requesting service. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi- cates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America, Keyboard Division 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 MEXICO Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA. Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Argentina S.A. Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha de Panama S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: 507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 CLP-970A/970AM/970AC AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 01-60203900 THE NETHERLANDS SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so unless specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product performance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected. For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 Model Serial No. BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ASIA FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Claviers BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Home Keyboard Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid) Spain Tel: 91-201-0700 GREECE Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho Dong, Seocho Gu, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3486-0011 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-703-0900 Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 FINLAND F-Musiikki Oy Kluuvikatu 6, P.O. Box 260, SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 09 618511 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. 11 Ubi Road #06-00, Meiban Industrial Building, Singapore Tel: 65-747-4374 TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2713-8999 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor, Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng, Bangkok 10320, Thailand Tel: 02-641-2951 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: 971-4-881-5868 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 2737-7688 PHILIPPINES DENMARK OTHER COUNTRIES HONG KONG Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-2312 Purchase Date HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: 053-460-3273 [CL] 21 92-469 1 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. R CLP-970A/CLP-970AM/CLP-970AC Owner’s manual IMPORTANT Check your power supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel. Clavinova Web Site (English only) http://www.yamaha.co.jp/english/product/cl/ M.D.G., PA • DMI Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2000 Yamaha Corporation V?????? ???AP?????.?-??B0 Printed in Indonesia Yamaha Manual Library (English versions only) http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ CLP-970A CLP-970AM CLP-970AC Owner’s manual